Honda Civic Hatchback Owner’s Manual 2022

Owner’s Manual

2022 CIVIC

Hatchback

 

Honda Civic Hatchback Owner’s Manual 2022 Download

Event Data Recorders

 

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).

 

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

 

How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act

The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

System Updates Terms and Conditions*

General

Your vehicle has an application that allows your 9-in. Color Touchscreen to automatically search for Honda software updates that are specific to your 9-in. Color Touchscreen and its connected devices (initially every one (1) week via Wi-Fi or every four (4) weeks via Telematics Control Unit (TCU)*, queries may occur more or less frequently due to internet outages, retries, direct user action, WAP push from the server or a change in query policy on the Honda servers). This application periodically transmits to our servers a limited amount of vehicle and device information (Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), the Model Type (MT) Identification Number, Hardware and Software Part Number, Serial Number, Software Version, preferred language, Internet Protocol (IP) address, Transaction Log (alert or update viewing, update download and installation, software status), etc.). When the application finds an update from the server, the application initially asks permission to download and install the update. Where available, in your settings menu you may elect to automatically download and install these updates or you may elect to manually update the system.

When your 9-in. Color Touchscreen searches our servers for updates or alerts, we will automatically provide you with the opportunity to update your devices or transmit the update or alert directly to your 9-in. Color Touchscreen. We will also maintain on our servers a log of the updates or alerts that are installed.

Your Personal Data

Should the aforementioned information transmitted to Honda constitute personal information in your region, please note that this information will be treated in strict accordance with the rules and regulations outlined in this notice as well as applicable data protection law.

* Not available on all models

The terms of our privacy policy are incorporated into these terms by reference and your use of system updates will be subject to the privacy policy. Our privacy policy sets out information about how we and any named third parties will process any personal data we collect from you or that you provide to us, via the application.

For further details, see Honda’s connected product privacy policy at:

U.S.: www.honda.com

Canada: www.honda.ca/privacy/vehicledata

Honda collects, uses and stores your personal data for the reasons set out below:

to deliver the system updates and related services to you;
to allow us to improve and optimize the system updates products and services;
to respond to user questions and complaints; and for internal record keeping.
where necessary for Honda’s legitimate interests, as listed below, and where our interests are not overridden by your data protection rights.
Protecting our legitimate business interests and legal rights includes, but is not limited to, use in connection with compliance, regulatory, auditing, legal claims (including disclosure of such information in connection with legal process or litigation) and other ethics and compliance reporting requirements.

Honda will also convert personal data into anonymous data and use it (normally on an aggregated statistical basis) for uses such as market research and analysis, to improve the system updates, to analyze trends, and to assess the success of software update releases. Aggregated personal information does not personally identify you or any other user of the system updates.

Honda may share this data with Honda’s worldwide support organization or affiliated Honda companies or other third parties engaged by Honda for the purposes of rendering support services in connection with system support.

Software End User License Agreement

Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by the End User License Agreement in Owner’s Manual, and which contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services, functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement.

You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda Motor Co., Inc., Honda Automobile Customer Service, Mail Stop CHI-5, 1919 Torrance Blvd., Torrance, CA 90501-2746.

Privacy Notice

This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.

To learn more about how we collect and use Personal

Information, please read our Privacy Policy, accessible at

www.honda.com.

A Few Words About Safety

 

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:

Safety Labels – on the vehicle.
Safety Messages – preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean:
could hurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment.

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

Safety Headings – such as Important Safety Precautions.
Safety Section – such as Safe Driving.
Instructions – how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information – please

read it carefully.

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

The Navigation Manual is available online at owners.honda.com (U.S.) or honda.ca (Canada). If you are the first registered owner of your vehicle, you may request a complimentary printed copy of the Navigation Manual within the first six months of vehicle purchase. To request a copy, visit owners.honda.com. In Canada, please request a copy from your Honda dealer.

This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.

Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.

This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada.

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation.

Safe Driving P. 39
For Safe Driving P. 40 Seat Belts P. 44 Airbags P. 53

Instrument Panel P. 89
Indicators P. 90 Gauges and Driver Information Interface P. 112

Controls P. 157
Clock P. 158 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 160 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 186 Interior Convenience Items P. 215

Features P. 239
Audio System P. 240 Audio System Basic Operation P. 248, 273

Customized Features P. 366, 374 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver* P. 398

2 Driving P. 441

Before Driving P. 442 Towing a Trailer P. 447

Multi-View Rear Camera P. 624 Refueling P. 626

Maintenance P. 631
Before Performing Maintenance P. 632 Maintenance MinderTM P. 635 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 665 Climate Control System Maintenance P. 681

Handling the Unexpected P. 689
Tools P. 690 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 691

Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 705 Overheating P. 706

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 721

Information P. 725
Specifications P. 726 Identification Numbers P. 728

Emissions Testing P. 731 Warranty Coverages P. 734

Child Safety P. 73 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 87 Safety Labels P. 88

Hatch P. 176

Security System P. 179

Windows P. 182

Moonroof* P. 185

Mirrors P. 204

Seats P. 206

Climate Control System P. 233

Audio Error Messages P. 343

General Information on the Audio System P. 345

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 401, 421

Refuel Recommend P. 440

When Driving P. 448

Honda Sensing® P. 495

Braking P. 601

Parking Your Vehicle P. 613

Fuel Economy and CO

2

Emissions P. 629

Turbo Engine Vehicle* P. 630

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 645

Replacing Light Bulbs P. 660

Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 668

Battery P. 678

Remote Transmitter Care P. 680

Cleaning P. 682

Accessories and Modifications P. 687

Engine Does Not Start P. 698

If the Battery Is Dead P. 702

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 708

Fuses P. 714

Emergency Towing P. 720

If You Cannot Open the Hatch P. 722

Refueling P. 723

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 729

Reporting Safety Defects P. 730

Authorized Manuals P. 737

Customer Service Information P. 738

Contents

Quick Reference Guide P. 8

Safe Driving P. 39

Instrument Panel P. 89

Controls P. 157

Features P. 239

Driving P. 441

Maintenance P. 631

Handling the Unexpected P. 689

Information P. 725

Index P. 739

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index

 

❚Brightness Control (P201, 202)

System Indicators (P90)
Gauges (P112)
Driver Information Interface (P116, 139, 142)
ENGINE START/STOP Button (P186) ❚Audio System (P240)
❚Navigation System*

() See Navigation System Manual

❚Hazard Warning Button

❚Front Seat Heater Buttons* (P231)

❚Climate Control System (P233)

❚Rear Defogger (P200)

❚Heated Door Mirror Button* (P200) ❚Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

(P70)

(Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P482)
Safety Support Switch (P493, 503, 587)
Parking Sensor System Button* (P616)
8

(P189,190)

❚Headlights/Turn Signals

 

❚Fog Lights* (P193)

❚Paddle Shifter (Shift down)* (P461)

❚Left Selector Wheel (P117)

❚Horn (Press an area around .)

❚Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Buttons* (P522)

❚Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Buttons* (P543)

❚Wipers/Washers (P197)

❚Paddle Shifter (Shift up)* (P461)

❚Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button

(P566)

❚Right Selector Wheel* (P143)

❚Interval Button (P536)

Canadian models

❚Heated Steering Wheel* (P230)

Steering Wheel Adjustments (P203)
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System Voice Control Button* (P421)
Audio Remote Controls (P244)
(home) Button* (P116)
Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 9

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index

 

Power Window Switches (P182)
Master Door Lock Switch (P174)
Door Mirror Controls (P205)
❚Driver’s Front Airbag (P56)

❚Rearview Mirror (P204)

❚HomeLink® Buttons* (P399)

❚Passenger’s Front Airbag (P56)

❚Wireless Charger* (P226)

❚USB Port(s) (P241)

❚Accessory Power Socket (P225)

❚Glove Box (P217)

❚Shift Lever

Continuously Variable

Transmission (P457, 459)

Manual Transmission (P463)

❚Interior Fuse Box (P716)

❚ECON Button* (P466)*

❚Drive Mode Switch (P478)

Hood Release Handle (P647)

❚Auto Idle Stop OFF Button (P468)

❚Electric Parking Brake Switch (P601)

❚Automatic Brake Hold Button (P606)

10

❚Cargo Area Light

 

❚Ceiling Light (P215)

❚Side Curtain Airbags (P67)

❚Grab Handle

❚Coat Hook (P221)

Rear Side Airbags (P64)
Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P80)
Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P82)
Rear Seats (P209)
LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P78)
Sun Visors
Vanity Mirrors
Map Lights (P216)
Moonroof Switch* (P185)
Sunglasses Holder* (P221)
Seat Belts (P44)
USB Ports* (P241)
Knee Airbags (P61)
Front Seat (P206)
Front Side Airbags (P64)
Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 11

Visual Index

 

Quick Reference Guide

❚Maintenance Under the Hood (P645)

❚Windshield Wipers (P197, 665)

❚Power Door Mirrors (P205)

❚Side Turn Signal Lights* (P189, 660)

❚Door Lock/Unlock Control (P163)

❚Headlights (P190, 660)

❚Front Turn Signal Lights (P189, 660)

❚Parking/Daytime Running Lights (P193, 660)

❚Front Side Marker Lights (P190, 660)

❚Tires (P668, 691)

❚Fog Lights* (P193, 660)

❚How to Refuel (P627)

❚Rear Wiper (P199, 667)

❚Opening/Closing the Hatch (P176)

❚High-Mount Brake Light (P664)

❚Multi-View Rear Camera (P624)

❚Hatch Release Button (P177)

❚Rear License Plate Light (P663)

❚Taillights (P663)

❚Back-Up Lights (P663)

❚Rear Side Marker Lights (P661)

❚Taillights (P661)

❚Brake Lights (P661)

❚Rear Turn Signal Lights (P661)

12

Auto Idle Stop Function

 

To improve fuel economy, the engine stops and then restarts as detailed below. When Auto Idle Stop is on, the Auto Idle Stop indicator (green) comes on. (P467, 473)

At

Continuously variable transmission

Engine status

Deceleration

Automatic Brake Hold Off

Automatic Brake Hold On

(P606)

(P606)

Depress the brake pedal.

On

Stop

*1

*2

With the automatic brake hold system

Keep the brake pedal depressed.

activated, you can release the brake pedal

when the indicator comes on.

Off

Start-up

Restarting

Release the brake pedal.

With the automatic brake hold system

activated, depress the accelerator pedal.

*1:U.S. models

*2:Canada models

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 13

Quick Reference Guide

At

Manual transmission

Deceleration

1.

Depress the brake pedal.

2.

Fully depress the clutch pedal.

 

Stop

● Continue to depress the brake pedal.

● Move the shift lever to (N.

● Release the clutch pedal.

Start-up

1.

Depress the clutch pedal fully again.

2.

Move the shift lever to (1.

3.

Depress the accelerator pedal to

resume driving.

Engine status

On

Off

Restarting

14

Eco Assist® System (P466, 478)

 

Ambient Meter

With SPORT mode* off, the color of the ambient meter changes to green to indicate that the vehicle is being driven in a fuel efficient manner.
Quick

Ambient Meter

*1

*3

*1

*2

*4

ECON Mode Indicator (P103)

Comes on when the ECON mode is

on or selected.

*1:Models with A-type meter

*2:Models with B-type meter

*3:Models without drive mode switch

*4:Models with drive mode switch

*2

*3

*4

ECON Button*3/ DRIVE MODE Switch*4

(P466,478)

Helps maximize fuel economy.

Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 15

Quick Reference Guide

Safe Driving (P39)

 

Airbags (P53)

Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P73)

All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P87)

● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.

Seat Belts (P44)

● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well

back in the seat.

● Check that your passengers are wearing

their seat belts correctly.

Before Driving Checklist (P442)

● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,

steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.

Fasten your lap belt as

low as possible.

16

Instrument Panel (P89)

 

System Indicators (P90)/Gauges (P112)/Driver Information Interface (P116, 139, 142)

Models with A-type meter

Quick Reference

Traffic Sign Recognition System (P114)

Outside Temperature (P114)

Tachometer (P113) Odometer

(P113)

Speedometer (P112)

Guide

Driver Information Interface (P116)

Fuel Gauge (P113)

Shift Up/Down Indicator*

M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator* (P95)

Shift Position Indicator*/Transmission System Indicator* (P95, 96)

* Not available on all models 17

Quick Reference Guide

Models with B-type meter

 

You can change the gauge design.
Change gauge design (P156)

Traffic Sign Recognition System (P114)

Driver Information Interface (Left Side Area) (P139)

Driver Information Interface (Right Side Area) (P142)

Tachometer (P113)

Speedometer (P112)

Temperature Gauge (P113)

Fuel Gauge (P113)

Outside Temperature (P114)

Odometer (P113)

M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator* (P95)

Shift Position Indicator*/Transmission System Indicator* (P95, 96)

Shift Up/Down Indicator*

18

MENU Button

Controls (P157)

Clock (P158)

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

a Press the MENU button.

b

c Select Automatic Time, then select OFF. d

e Select 12H/24H to change 12 or 24 hour clock.

f Select 3 or 4 .

g Select Set to set the time.

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

 

To adjust date

To adjust time

a Press the

button.

b Select General

Settings.

c Select System.

d Select Date & Time.

e Select Set Date & Time.

f Select Automatic Date & Time, then

select OFF.

g Select Set Date or Set Time.

h

i Select Save to set the date or time.

The audio system receives signals from GPS satellites, updating the clock automatically.

ENGINE START/STOP Button (P186)

Press the button to change the vehicle’s power mode.

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 19

Quick Reference Guide

Turn Signals (P189)

Turn Signal Control Lever Right

Left

Lights (P190)

Light Control Switches

High Beam

Low Beam

Flashing

Wipers and Washers

 

(P197)

Wiper/Washer Control Lever

Adjustment Ring*

(-: Low sensitivity*1

: Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2

(+: High sensitivity*1

: Higher speed, more sweeps*2

Pull toward you to spray washer fluid.

MIST

OFF

AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies automatically

INT*2: Low speed with intermittent

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

*1:Models with automatic intermittent wipers

*2:Models with manual intermittent operation

Models with automatic intermittent wipers

AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system:

Cleaning the windshield
Driving through a car wash
No rain present
Steering Wheel (P203)

To adjust, push the adjustment lever down, adjust to the desired position, then lock the lever back in place.
To lock

To adjust

Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside

(P173)

Pull either front door inner handle to unlock and open it at the same time.
20

Hatch(P176)

Hatch release

button

Models without keyless access system

With all the doors unlocked, press the hatch release button and lift open the
hatch.

Models with keyless access system

Press the hatch release button to unlock and open the hatch when you carry the keyless remote.
Power Door Mirrors

 

(P205)

With the power mode in ON, move the selector switch to L or R.
Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

Power Windows (P182)

With the power mode in ON, open and close the power windows.
If the power window lock button is in the off position, each passenger’s window can be opened and closed with its own switch.
If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator is on), each passenger’s window switch is disabled.
Indicator

Window

Switch

Power Window Lock Button

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 21

Quick Reference Guide

Climate Control System (P233)

Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
Press the button to turn the system on or off.
Press the button to defrost the windshield.

Models with SYNC button

Dashboard

vents

Driver’s Side Temperature

Control Dial

(Recirculation) Button

AUTO Button

(Windshield Defroster) Button

Dashboard

Floor vents

Floor and

and floor

defroster

vents

vents

Fan Control Dial

Passenger’s Side Temperature

Control Dial

SYNC Button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

(ON/OFF) Button

22

Models without SYNC button

 

Dashboard

Dashboard

Floor vents

Floor and

vents

and floor

defroster

vents

vents

Temperature Control Dial

Fan Control Dial

Quick Reference Guide

AUTO Button

(Recirculation) Button (Windshield Defroster) Button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

(ON/OFF) Button

23

Quick Reference Guide

Features (P239)

Audio Remote Controls

(P244)

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

SOURCE Button

VOL(+/VOL(-

(Volume) Switch

SOURCE Button
Press to cycle through the audio modes as follows:

FM AM USB/iPod/Apple CarPlay/ Android Auto Bluetooth® Audio

VOL + / VOL – (Volume) Switch Press to adjust the volume up/down.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons Radio:
Press / to change the preset

radio station. Press and hold / to change the strong station.

iPod, USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio, or Smartphone Connection:

Press / to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song.

USB flash drive or Bluetooth® Audio:

Press and hold / to change a

 

folder/group.

Left Selector Wheel
Roll up or down: To cycle through the audio modes, roll up or down and then press the left selector wheel:

FM

AM

SiriusXM®

USB

Bluetooth® Audio

Smartphone Connection

(Apple CarPlay/Android Auto)

24

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

 

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons

 

Left Selector Wheel

VOL(+/VOL(-(Volume) Switch

VOL + / VOL – (Volume) Switch Press to adjust the volume up/down.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons Radio:
Press / to change the preset

radio station. Press and hold / to change the strong station.

iPod, USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio, or Smartphone Connection:

Press / to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. USB flash drive:

Press and hold / to change a folder.

Left Selector Wheel
Roll up or down: To cycle through the modes, roll up or down and then press the left selector wheel:

 

Back

Phone

FM

AM

SiriusXM®

USB

Bluetooth® Audio

Apps

(Apple CarPlay/Android Auto)

Customize display

Quick Reference Guide

25

Quick Reference Guide

Audio system (P240)

 

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen (P248)

Audio/Information Screen

VOL/ AUDIO

(Volume/Power) Knob

(Seek/Track) Button

(Seek/Track) Button

PHONE Button

RADIO Button

Selector Knob

MENU Button

(Back) Button

CONNECT Button

MEDIA Button

26

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen (P273)

 

For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual

 

Audio/Information Screen

(Home) Button

(Back) Button

VOL/ AUDIO

(Volume/Power) Knob

(Seek/Track) Button (Seek/Track) Button

Quick Reference Guide

27

Quick Reference Guide

Driving (P441)

 

Manual Transmission* (P463) Continuously Variable Transmission*

(P456,457,459)

Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
Shifting
Depress the brake pedal

and press the shift lever

release button to shift.

Press the shift lever release

button and shift.

Shift without pressing the

shift lever release button.

Models without

Models with

paddle shifter

paddle shifter

Shift Lever

Release

Button

Park

Used when parking or starting the engine.

Reverse

Used when reversing.

Neutral

Transmission is not locked.

Drive

Used:

For normal driving.
Models with paddle shifters

When temporarily driving in the 7-speed manual shift mode.
When driving in the 7-speed manual shift mode (when driving in SPORT mode).
Drive (S)*

Used:

For better acceleration.
To increase engine braking.
When going up or down hills.
Low*

Used to further increase engine braking.
Used when going up or down hills.
28

7-Speed Manual Shift

Mode* (P461)

Allows you to manually shift the transmission up or down without removing your hands from the steering wheel.
Shift Indicator

M Indicator

When the transmission is in

 

(D with SPORT mode

Pulling a paddle shifter changes the mode from continuously variable transmission to 7-speed manual shift mode.
The M indicator and the selected speed number are displayed in the shift indicator.
Quick Reference Guide

Shift Position Indicator

Shift Down (- Shift Up (+ Paddle Shifter Paddle Shifter

When the transmission is in

(D

Pulling a paddle shifter temporarily changes the mode from continuously variable transmission to 7-speed manual shift mode. The selected speed number is displayed in the shift indicator.
* Not available on all models 29

Quick Reference Guide

VSA® On and Off (P482)

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces.
VSA® comes on automatically every time you start the engine.
To partially disable or fully restore VSA® function, press and hold the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a beep.
CMBSTM On and Off (P503)

When a possible frontal collision is likely unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to reduce the vehicle speed and the severity of the collision.
The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine.
To turn the CMBSTM on or off, use the safety support switch.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)* (P484)

 

Detects a change in tire conditions and overall dimensions due to decrease in tire pressures.
The TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine.
A calibration procedure must be performed when certain conditions arise.
30

Refueling (P626)

 

Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

Fuel tank capacity: 12.39 US gal (46.9 L)

Unlock the driver’s b door.Press the area
indicated by the arrow to release the fuel fill door. You will hear a click.

c After filling, wait about five seconds

before removing the filler nozzle.

Wait for five seconds

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 31

Quick Reference Guide

Honda Sensing®

Models with Low Speed Braking Control

Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors: the sonar sensors located in the front and rear bumpers, and the front grille, and a front wide view camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.

Models without Low Speed Braking Control

Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of a front wide view camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.

Front Wide View Camera

Sonar Sensors*

(P495)

 

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) (P499)

The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead from behind, an oncoming vehicle in front, a pedestrian, or someone riding a bicycle (moving bicycle). The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as assist in reducing speed, avoiding collisions, and reducing collision severity.

Low Speed Braking Control* (P511)

Continuously variable transmission models with parking sensor system

Using sonar sensors located on the front and rear bumpers, and the front grille, this system detects if there is danger of a potential collision with a wall or other obstacle during normal driving or when the accelerator pedal is depressed with too much force. The system then assists in avoiding collisions and reducing damage from impact through assistive braking and/ or assistive driving power suppression.

Low Speed Braking Control* (P517)

Manual transmission models with parking sensor system

Using sonar sensors located on the front and rear bumpers and the front grille, this system detects if there is danger of a potential collision with a wall or other obstacle during normal driving. The system then assists in avoiding collisions and reducing damage from impact through assistive braking.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow* (P522)

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.

32

Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC)* (P543)

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (P563)

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Traffic Jam Assist* (P575)

 

The traffic jam assist system uses a camera mounted to the upper portion of the windshield to detect and monitor left and right white (or yellow) traffic lane lines. Based on inputs from the camera, the system can apply steering torque to keep your vehicle in the center of the detected lane.

Road Departure Mitigation System (P 584)

Alerts and helps assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings, or approaching the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border) or a detected oncoming vehicle.

Traffic Sign Recognition System (P592)

Reminds you of road sign information, such as the current speed limit your vehicle has just passed through, showing it on the gauge.

Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 33

Quick Reference Guide

Maintenance (P631)

 

Under the Hood (P645)

● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer fluid. Add

Wiper Blades (P665)

when necessary.

● Replace blades if they leave streaks

● Check brake/clutch

*

fluid.

across the windshield or become

● Check the battery condition monthly.

noisy.

a Pull the hood release handle under the driver’s side lower corner

of the dashboard.

Locate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and then raise the
hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the

lever.

Tires (P668)

Lights (P660)

● Inspect tires and wheels

● Inspect all lights regularly.

regularly.

● Check tire pressures regularly.

● Install snow tires for winter

driving.

When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly locked in place.
34

Handling the Unexpected (P689)

 

Flat Tire (P691)

Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire in the cargo area.
Indicators Come On

(P708)

Identify the indicator and consult the owner’s manual.
Engine Won’t Start

(P698)

If the battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery.
Blown Fuse (P714)

Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate.
Overheating (P706)

Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down.
Emergency Towing

(P720)

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
Quick Reference Guide

* Not available on all models 35

What to Do If

 

Quick Reference Guide

Manual transmission models

The power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to ACCESSORY. Why?

The steering wheel may be locked.
Move the steering wheel left and right after pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Continuously variable transmission models

The shift lever should be moved to P.

The power mode does not

change from ACCESSORY

to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Why?

Why does the brake pedal pulsate slightly when applying the brakes?

This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never pump the brake pedal.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P611)
The rear door cannot be Check if the childproof lock is in

opened from inside the the lock position. If so, open the

vehicle. Why? rear door with the outside door

handle.

To cancel this function, slide the

lever up to the unlock position.

36

Why do the doors lock

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are

after I unlocked the doors?

relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper

The beeper sounds when:

sound when I open the

The power mode is in ACCESSORY.

driver’s door?

The exterior lights are left on.

The Auto Idle Stop is in operation.

 

Quick Reference Guide

Models with keyless access system

Why does a beeper sound when I walk away from the vehicle after I close the door?

The beeper sounds if the remote key has moved outside the walk away auto lock operating range before all doors completely close.

Locking the doors and hatch (Walk away auto lock®) (P166)
Why does the beeper

The beeper sounds when the driver and/or any passenger are

sound when I start driving?

not wearing their seat belts.

Pressing the electric

Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal

parking brake switch does

depressed.

not release the parking

brake. Why?

37

Quick Reference

U.S. models

I’m seeing an amber indicator of a tire with an exclamation point. What is that?

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate the system.

 

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)* (P484)
Guide

Depressing the accelerator

Fasten the driver’s seat belt.

pedal does not release the

Check if the transmission is in P* or N. If so, select any other

parking brake

position.

automatically. Why?

Why do I hear a screeching

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle

sound when I apply the

inspected by a dealer.

brake pedal?

38

Safe Driving

You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving

Airbags

Child Safety

Important Safety Precautions…………..

40

Airbag System Components……………

53

Protecting Child Passengers ……………

73

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features…………

42

Types of Airbags …………………………..

56

Safety of Infants and Small Children ….

75

Safety Checklist ……………………………

43

Front Airbags (SRS) ……………………….

56

Safety of Larger Children ……………….

85

Seat Belts

Knee Airbags ……………………………….

61

Exhaust Gas Hazard

About Your Seat Belts ……………………

44

Side Airbags…………………………………

64

Carbon Monoxide Gas…………………..

87

Fastening a Seat Belt ……………………..

49

Side Curtain Airbags ……………………..

67

Safety Labels

Seat Belt Inspection……………………….

52

Airbag System Indicators………………..

69

Label Locations …………………………….

88

Airbag Care …………………………………

72

39

For Safe Driving

Safe Driving

 

The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important.

Important Safety Precautions

Always wear your seat belt

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.

Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat.

Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Don’t drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.

1Important Safety Precautions

 

Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.

40

Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving.

Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.

To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle
Children, pets, and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death. Even if the climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the climate control system can shut off at any time.

For Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

Safe Driving

41

For Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

 

Safe Driving

 

9

10

6

11

7

8

8

10

 

12

9

9

11

12

13

Safety Cage

Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Collapsible Steering Column 6 Seat Belts

7 Front Airbags

Knee Airbags
9 Side Airbags

10 Side Curtain Airbags

11 Door Locks

Seat Belt Tensioners
Outer Lap Pretensioners
1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

 

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash.

Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front and rear outer seat belts in a sufficient crash.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.

42

For Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist
Safety Checklist

 

For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive.

After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the hatch are closed and locked. Locking the doors and the hatch helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the hatch.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 172

Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.
2 Seats P. 206

Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraints Positions P. 212

Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 49

Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height, and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 73

1Safety Checklist

 

If the door and/or hatch open message appears on the driver information interface, a door and/or the hatch is not completely closed. Close all doors and the hatch tightly until the message disappears.

Warnings P. 128, 154
Safe Driving

 

43

Seat Belts

Safe Driving

 

About Your Seat Belts

 

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.

In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:

frontal impacts
side impacts
rear impacts
rollovers
Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor locks to restrain your body.

The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 80
1About Your Seat Belts

 

WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.

If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt, then extend it slowly.

Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.

Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.

44

Seat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:

All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
1About Your Seat Belts

 

If a front or rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then, refasten the belt.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 45

Seat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving

 

Seat Belt Reminder
Front seats

The seat belt system includes an indicator on the instrument panel to remind the driver or a front passenger or both to fasten their seat belts.

If you set the power mode to ON and a seat belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound, and the indicator will blink. After a few seconds, the beeper will stop and the indicator will come on and remain illuminated until the seat belt is fastened.

The beeper will periodically sound and the

indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving

until the seat belt is fastened.

1Seat Belt Reminder

 

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the power mode is set to ON.

When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound. The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them.

Protecting Child Passengers P. 73
46

 

Fastened
Unfastened
Rear seats
Your vehicle monitors rear seat belt use.

A driver information interface notifies you if any of the rear seat belts are not used.

The display appears when:

Any of the rear passengers’ seat belts are unfastened when the power mode is turned to ON.
A rear door is opened and then closed.
Any of the rear passengers fastens or unfastens their seat belt.
The seat belt reminder indicator blinks and beeper sounds if any rear passenger’s seat belt is unfastened while driving.

To see the display:

Switching the Display P. 116, 143
Seat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Safe Driving

Continued 47

Seat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving

 

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats and the outer rear seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts and the outer rear seat belts during a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags or the front knee airbags.

Front seats

 

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

 

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.

If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash.

During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on both sides of the vehicle also activates.

Outer rear seats

 

48

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Fastening a Seat Belt

 

After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well back in the seat:

Seats P. 206
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

 

Pull out slowly.

Correct

Seated

Posture.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

 

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism.

If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully retracted position, firmly pull out on the shoulder belt once, then push it back in.

Safe Driving

 

Latch

 

Plate

Buckle

Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or caught on anything.

Then, smoothly pull it out of the retractor and fasten. If you are unable to release the seat belt from a fully retracted position, do not allow anyone to sit in the seat, and take your vehicle to a dealer for repair.

About Your Seat Belts P. 44
Seat Belt Inspection P. 52
Continued 49

Seat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving

 

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as

possible across your hips, then pull up on

Lap belt

the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part

fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic

as low as

possible

bones take the force of a crash and reduces

the chance of internal injuries.

4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to

remove any slack, then check that the belt

rests across the center of your chest and

over your shoulder. This spreads the forces

of a crash over the strongest bones in your

upper body.

 

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter occupants.

Move the anchor up and down while holding the release button.
Position the anchor so that the belt rests

across the center of your chest and over your shoulder.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

 

WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.

To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely.

When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing door.

1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure.

The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time.

Push

50

Seat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Advice for Pregnant Women
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

 

Wear the shoulder belt

across the chest avoiding

the abdomen.

Wear the lap part of the

belt as low as possible

across the hips.

1Advice for Pregnant Women

 

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.

To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag:

When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle.
When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust the seat as far back as possible.
Safe Driving

 

51

Seat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe Driving

 

Seat Belt Inspection

 

Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly, and the belts retract easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.

Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.

A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.

1Seat Belt Inspection

 

WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.

52

Airbags

Airbag System Components

 

9 1110 9

12

7

9

6

9

8

6

6

9

Safe Driving

6

9

Continued 53

AirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving

 

The front, driver’s knee, front passenger’s knee, side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes:

aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger’s airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

bTwo knee airbags. The driver’s knee airbag is stored under the steering column; the front passenger’s knee airbag is stored under the glove box. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

cFour side airbags, one for the driver, one for the front passenger and two for the rear outboard. The front airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat-backs and the rear airbags are stored next to the outer rear seating positions. All are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

dTwo side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

eAn electronic control unit that, when the power mode is in ON, continually monitors information about the various impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat belt tensioners, and other vehicle information. During a crash event the unit can record such information.

fAutomatic seat belt tensioners for the front seats and outer rear seats. In addition, the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate sensors that detect whether or not the belts are fastened.

gDriver’s seat position sensor. This sensor detects the driver’s seat slide position to help determine the optimal deployment of the driver’s airbag.

hWeight sensors in the front passenger’s seat. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.

iImpact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact.

jAn indicator on the center console that alerts you that the front passenger’s front airbag has been turned off.

kAn indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners.

lA rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags.

54

AirbagsuAirbag System Components
Important Facts About Your Airbags
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.

Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front and driver’s knee and front passenger’s knee airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

1Important Facts About Your Airbags

 

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover.

Safe Driving

 

55

AirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Safe Driving

 

Types of Airbags

 

Your vehicle is equipped with four types of airbags:

Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
Knee airbags: Airbags under the steering column and under the glove box.
Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s outer seat-backs and next to the outer rear seating positions.
Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.

1Types of Airbags

 

The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is in ON.

After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Front Airbags (SRS)

 

The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary restraint system.

Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

1Front Airbags (SRS)

During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.

56

AirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Operation
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest.

 

The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

1How the Front Airbags Work

 

Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 57

AirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving

 

When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.

Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle.

Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions.

Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide little if any protection.

When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.

When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.

58

AirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Advanced Airbags
The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants.

The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a seat position sensor.

 

Based on information from this sensor and the severity of the impact, the advanced airbag system determines the optimal deployment of

Driver’s

Seat the driver’s airbag.

Position

Sensor

1Advanced Airbags

 

If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position sensor or the passenger’s seat weight sensors, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the driver’s seating position or passenger’s occupant classification) with a force corresponding to the severity of the impact.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator P. 69
For the advanced front airbags to work properly, confirm that:

• The occupant is sitting in an upright position,

Safe Driving

 

Passenger’s Seat

 

Weight

Sensors

The front passenger’s advanced airbag system has weight sensors. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger’s airbag.

For adult size occupants, the system will automatically activate the front passenger’s airbag. If a small adult sits in the front passenger seat and the system does not recognize him/her as an adult, see

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 70
wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is

not excessively reclined.

• The occupant is not leaning against the door or

center console.

• The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front

of them.

• There are no objects hanging from the front

passenger’s seat.

• Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back

pocket.

• The steering wheel and passenger’s side dashboard

are not obstructed by any object.

• No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.

Continued 59

AirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Safe Driving

 

We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger’s seat. However, if you do allow a small child or infant to ride in the front passenger’s seat, the system is designed to automatically deactivate the front passenger’s airbag. Do not let a small child or infant ride in the front passenger’s seat if the airbag does not automatically deactivate.

1Advanced Airbags

 

There is no child seat or other object pressing against the rear of the seat or seat-back.
There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger’s seat.
There are no objects placed under or beside the front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 70

The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 683

60

AirbagsuKnee Airbags
Knee Airbags

 

The knee SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help keep the driver and/or front passenger in the proper position and to help maximize the benefit provided by the vehicle’s other safety features.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbag is designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary restraint system.

Housing Locations
1Knee Airbags

 

Do not attach accessories on or near a knee airbag as they can interfere with the proper operation of the airbag, or even hurt someone if the airbag inflates.

The driver and front passenger should not store any items under the seat or behind their feet. The items can interfere with proper airbag deployment in the event of a moderate to severe frontal collision and may result in inadequate protection.

Safe Driving

 

Housing

 

Location

 

Housing

Location

The knee airbag for the driver and the one for

the front passenger are housed under the

steering column and the glove box

respectively.

Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

Continued 61

AirbagsuKnee Airbags
Operation

When

DrivingSafe

inflated

Knee

Airbag

When

inflated

 

The driver’s and front passenger’s knee airbag

deploy at the same time as the driver’s and

front passenger’s airbag respectively.

Knee Airbag

62

When knee airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.

When knee airbag may not deploy, even though exterior damage appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.

AirbagsuKnee Airbags

Safe Driving

63

AirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving

 

Side Airbags

 

The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver, front passenger, or an outer rear seat occupant during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seat-backs and next to the outer rear seating positions.

 

Each are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

Housing

Location

 

1Side Airbags

 

Make sure you and your front seat passenger always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from deploying properly and increases your risk of serious injury.

Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer.

Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.

Housing

Location

64

Operation

When

inflated

Side

Airbag

 

When

inflated

Side

Airbag

When the sensors detect a moderate-to-severe side impact, the control unit signals the side airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate.

AirbagsuSide Airbags

Safe Driving

Continued 65

AirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving

 

When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag.

When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe

It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

66

AirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags

 

The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes.

Housing Locations
The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle.

 

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side impact.

 

1Side Curtain Airbags

 

To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.

Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates the seat belt tensioners for the front seats and outer rear seats.

Safe Driving

 

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

Continued 67

AirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision.

 

Safe Driving

68

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Airbag System Indicators

 

If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the driver information interface.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
When the power mode is set to ON

The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

 

WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 69

AirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving

 

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
■ When the passenger airbag off

U.S.

Canada

indicator comes on

 

The indicator comes on to alert you that the passenger’s airbag has been turned off. This occurs if the seat is empty or when the weight sensors determine that a small child or infant is on the passenger seat.

Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.

Child Safety P. 73
If the indicator is on, in the event of a crash the passenger’s airbag will not deploy.

The passenger’s knee airbag will not deploy, either.

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

 

To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm that:

The occupant is sitting in an upright position, wearing the seat belt properly and the seat-back is not excessively reclined.
The occupant is not leaning against the door or center console.
The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front of them.
There are no objects hanging from the front passenger’s seat.
Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back pocket.
No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.
There is no child seat or other object pressing against the rear of the seat or seat-back.
There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger’s seat.
There are no objects placed under or beside the front passenger’s seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The floor mat behind the front passenger’s seat is set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
70

AirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

 

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and

go off periodically if the total weight on the seat is

near the airbag cutoff threshold. For a small adult,

depending on physique and posture, the system may

not recognize him/her as an adult and thus deactivate

the passenger’s airbag.

If this occurs, please confirm that the conditions set

forth in the above bullet points on the previous page

are met.

If the above conditions are met and the indicator is

still on, then with the transmission in park, set the

power mode to OFF and back to ON.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as

possible if:

All of the above conditions are met, and the indicator comes on with an adult seated in the front passenger seat.
The seat is empty and the indicator is off.
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front

seat when the indicator is on.

Safe Driving

 

71

AirbagsuAirbag Care
Safe Driving

 

Airbag Care

 

You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations:

When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced.

When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, the seat belt tensioners for the front seats and outer rear seats, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-888-9-HONDA-9.

1Airbag Care

 

We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit.

72

Child Safety

Protecting Child Passengers

 

Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.

Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:

An inflating front airbag can injure or kill a

child sitting in the front seat.

• A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver’s ability to safely control the vehicle.

• Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat.

1Protecting Child Passengers

 

WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws restricting where children may ride.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 73

Child SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
Safe Driving

 

Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision.
Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash.
Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows, or seat adjustments.
Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
1Protecting Child Passengers

 

WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.

Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.

Safety Labels P. 88
74

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safety of Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat until the infant reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat.

Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat and the seat in front of it.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag system.

Airbags P. 53
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

1Protecting Infants

 

WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front.

Experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child so long as the child’s height and weight are appropriate for a rear facing seat.

Infants should never be seated in a forward facing position.

Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions before installation.

Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat installed in a rear seating position.

The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly detect the actual weight of the occupant.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 75

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Protecting Smaller Children
If a child has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rearward-facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat.

Forward-facing child seat placement

We strongly recommend placing a forward-facing child seat in a rear seating position.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child.

1Protecting Smaller Children

 

WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

76

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Selecting a Child Seat
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children). Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your child’s safety.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual for proper installation instructions.

Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.

• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.

• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

1Selecting a Child Seat

 

Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple.

LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 77

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.

Locate the anchor marks affixed to the base

of the seat cushion.

Pull out the anchor covers under the marks to expose the lower anchors.
Marks

Lower Anchors

3. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then

attach the child seat to the lower anchors

according to the instructions that came

with the child seat.

u When installing the child seat, make sure

that the lower anchors are not

Rigid Type

obstructed by the seat belt or any other

object.

Lower Anchors

 

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

 

WARNING
Never attach two child seats to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.

For your child’s safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

Flexible Type

78

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Straight Top Tether Type

 

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Other Top Tether Type

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Retract the cargo area cover.
2 Cargo Area Cover P. 223

Route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint.
Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

 

WARNING
Using the outer rear seats’ inner anchors to secure a LATCH-compatible child seat in the center seating position may result in failure of the child seat, causing injury or death.

Only use the outer rear seats’ inner anchors to install a child seat in the center seating position if the manufacturer’s instructions expressly permit.

Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the rear center seat

Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower anchors which are used to secure a LATCH-compatible child seat. The rear center seat, however, is not equipped with anchors of any kind.

The inner and outer anchors are spaced apart at a standard distance of 11 inches (280 mm). The distance between the two inner anchors is 15 inches (380 mm). LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted with rigid-type attachments cannot be installed in the rear center seat. However, a system fitted with flexible-type attachments can be installed in the center seat, provided that the manufacturer’s instructions for that system permit the use of the inner anchors with the stated spacing.

Before seating a child, make sure that the system is properly attached to both the lower anchors and tether anchors.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 79

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely necessary, the front passenger seat.

Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.

2. Route the seat belt through the child seat according to the seat manufacturer’s instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle.

u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all

the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor.

4. Let the seat belt retract a few inches and check that the retractor has switched modes by pulling on the webbing. It should not pull out again until it is reset by removing the latch plate from the buckle. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt

out, the lockable retractor is not

activated. Slowly pull the seat belt all the

way out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

 

A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

80

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat.

Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; less than one inch of movement should occur near the seat belt.
Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

 

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 81

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Adding Security with a Tether
1Adding Security with a Tether

 

Safe Driving

 

Outer Position

 

Tether Anchor Points

A tether anchor point is provided behind each rear seating position.

If you have a child seat that comes with a tether but can be installed with a seat belt, the tether may be used for additional security.

Always use a tether for forward-facing child seats when using the seat belt or lower anchors.

Center Position

 

Tether Anchor Point

82

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Straight Top Tether Type in Outer Position

 

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Other Top Tether Type in Outer Position

 

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Using an outer anchor
Retract the cargo area cover.
2 Cargo Area Cover P. 223

Locate the appropriate tether anchor point.
Route the tether strap over the head restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
Safe Driving

 

Continued 83

Child SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving

 

Straight Top Tether Type in Center Position

 

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Other Top Tether Type in Center Position

 

Anchor

Tether Strap Hook

Using the center anchor
1. Retract the cargo area cover.

2 Cargo Area Cover P. 223

2. Locate the appropriate tether anchor point and lift the cover.

3. Route the tether strap over the head restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.

4. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.

5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.

84

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safety of Larger Children

Protecting Larger Children

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.

Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions.

Checklist

• Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the edge of the seat?

• Does the shoulder belt cross between the child’s neck and arm?

• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as

possible, touching the child’s thighs?

• Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

1Safety of Larger Children

 

WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed.

Safe Driving

 

Continued 85

Child SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving

 

Booster Seats
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in the rear seat. For the child’s safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer’s recommendations.

 

Protecting Larger Children – Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:

Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information in this manual.
Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the seat.
Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly.

1Booster Seats

 

When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly.

There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.

Some U.S. states, and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive.

86

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Carbon Monoxide Gas

 

The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior.

Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.

• The exhaust system may have been damaged.

• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.

When you operate a vehicle with the hatch open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the hatch open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.

Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Set the fan speed to high.
Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

 

WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.

An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas.

Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine.

Safe Driving

 

87

 

Safe Driving

Safety Labels

Label Locations

 

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement.

 

Sun Visor

Canadian models

U.S. models

Air Conditioner System

2.0 L engine models for U.S. 1.5 L engine models for U.S.

Dashboard

U.S. models only

Canadian models

Reserve Tank Cap

88

Instrument Panel

This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators 90

Gauges and Driver Information Interface

Gauges 112

Models with A-type meter

 

Driver Information Interface 116

Models with B-type meter

 

Driver Information Interface (Left Side

Area) 139

Models with B-type meter

 

Driver Information Interface (Right Side

Area) 142

89

Indicators

Indicators come on/blink depending on the condition of the vehicle. Messages may display on the driver information interface at the same time. Please take the appropriate action outlined in the message, such as contacting a dealer.

 

Instrument Panel

 

U.S.

Parking Brake and

P.92

*1

Brake System

Canada

Indicator (Red)

U.S.

Parking Brake and

P.94

Brake System

*1

Indicator (Amber)

Canada

*1

Automatic Brake

Hold System

P.94

Indicator

U.S. *1

Automatic Brake

P.94

Hold Indicator

Canada

*1

Malfunction

P.95

Indicator Lamp

*1 Charging System Indicator

Shift Position

Indicator*

(7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/ Shift Indicator*
Transmission System Indicator*

Shift Up Indicator*

Shift Down

Indicator*

Seat Belt Reminder

Indicator

P. 95
P. 95
P. 95
P. 96
P. 96
P. 96
P. 97
Low Fuel Indicator

P.98

*1

Anti-lock Brake System

P.98

(ABS) Indicator

*1

Supplemental

P.98

Restraint System

Indicator

*1

Electric Power Steering

P.99

(EPS) System Indicator

*1

Vehicle Stability AssistTM

P.99

(VSA®) System Indicator

*1

Vehicle Stability AssistTM

P.99

(VSA®) OFF Indicator

*1: When you set the power mode to ON, these indicators come on to indicate that system checks are being performed. They go off a few seconds later or after the engine has started. If an indicator does not come on or turn off, there may be a malfunction in the corresponding system. To resolve the issue, follow the instructions in the owner’s manual.

* Not available on all models
Indicatorsu

*1

Low Tire Pressure/

 P. 100

TPMS Indicator*

Turn Signal and

 P. 101

Hazard Warning

Indicators

High Beam

 P. 101

Indicator

Lights On

 P. 101

Indicator

Fog Light

 P. 101

Indicator*

*1

Auto High-Beam

 P. 101

Indicator

System Message

 P. 102

Indicator

*2

ECON Mode

 P. 103

Indicator

*3

*1

*1

NORMAL Mode Indicator*

SPORT Mode

Indicator*

Low Temperature Indicator*

Cruise Mode Indicator (White/Green)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow* Interval Indicator*

Auto Idle Stop Off Indicator

Auto Idle Stop Suspend Indicator

Auto Idle Stop System Indicator (Amber)

Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green)

P. 103
P. 103
P. 103
P. 108
P. 108
P. 105
P. 106
P. 105
P. 105
Immobilizer System

 P. 104

Indicator

Security System Alarm

 P. 104

Indicator

Adaptive Cruise Control

*1 (ACC) with Low Speed

 P. 107

Follow* Indicator

(Amber)

Adaptive Cruise Control

 P. 107

(ACC) with Low Speed

Follow* Indicator

(White/Green)

Lane Keeping Assist

 P. 108

*1

System (LKAS) Indicator

(Amber)

Lane Keeping Assist

 P. 108

System (LKAS) Indicator

(White/Green)

*1

Safety Support

 P. 109

Indicator (Amber)

Safety Support

 P. 111

Indicator (Green/Gray)

Instrument Panel

 

*1: When you set the power mode to ON, these indicators come on to indicate that system checks are being performed. They go off a few seconds later or after the engine has started. If an indicator does not come on or turn off, there may be a malfunction in the corresponding system. To resolve the issue, follow the instructions in the owner’s manual.

*2: Models without drive mode switch

*3: Models with drive mode switch

* Not available on all models Continued 91

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on when the parking brake is

The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if

applied, and goes off when it is released.

you drive with the parking brake applied.

U.S.

Comes on for about 30 seconds when you apply

the electric parking brake while the power mode is

in ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then goes off.

Parking Brake and

Stays on for about 30 seconds when you set the

Canada

Brake System

power mode to VEHICLE OFF while the electric

Indicator (Red)

parking brake is applied, then goes off.

Comes on when the brake fluid level is

Comes on while driving – Make sure the parking

(Red)

low.

brake is released. Stop in a safe place and check

the brake fluid level.

2 What to do when the indicator comes on

while driving P. 710

92

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on if there is a problem with the

1.5 L engine models

brake system.

Comes on along with the Parking Brake and

Brake System Indicator (amber) – Immediately

stop in a safe place. Contact a dealer for repair. The

brake pedal becomes harder to operate. Depress

the pedal further than you normally do.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

U.S.

or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake

System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 712

Parking Brake and

All models

Comes on along with the ABS indicator – Have

Canada

Brake System

your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Indicator (Red)

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

or Blinks P. 710

(Red)

Blinks and the Parking Brake and Brake System

Indicator (amber) comes on at the same time –

There is a problem with the electric parking brake

system. The parking brake may not be set.

Avoid using the parking brake and have your

vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake

System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 712

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 93

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on while driving – Have your vehicle

U.S.

Comes on if there is a problem with a

system related to braking other than the

checked by a dealer.

Parking Brake and

conventional brake system.

With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal

braking ability.

Canada

Brake System

Comes on if there is a problem with the

Stays on constantly – Avoid using the parking

Indicator (Amber)

electric parking brake system and/or the

brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer

(Amber)

automatic brake hold system.

immediately.

Automatic Brake

Comes on when the automatic brake hold

Hold System

system is on.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 606

Indicator

Comes on when the automatic brake hold

U.S.

Automatic Brake

is activated.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 606

Canada

Hold Indicator

94

Indicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

After you have set the power mode to ON,

● Readiness codes are part of the on board

the vehicle performs system checks.

diagnostics for the emissions control systems.

However, if the readiness codes have not

2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 731

Malfunction

been set by that time, this indicator will

blink five times and then go off.

Indicator Lamp

Comes on if there is a problem with the
emissions control systems.

2

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On

Blinks when a misfire in the engine’s

or Blinks P. 709

cylinders is detected.

Comes on when there is a problem with

● Stop in a safe place and contact a dealer

Charging System

the charging system.

immediately.

2

Checking the Battery P. 678

Indicator

2

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

P. 709

Shift Position

Indicates the current shift position.

2

Shifting P. 457, 459

Indicator*

M (7-speed

Comes on when the 7-speed manual shift

manual shift mode)

mode is applied.

2

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 461

Indicator/Shift

Indicator*

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 95

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Blinks while driving – Avoid sudden starts and

Blinks if the transmission system has a

problem.

acceleration and have your vehicle checked by a

dealer immediately.

Blinks if the transmission system has a

Avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration and high

Transmission

problem and the performance of the

speed, and have your vehicle checked by a dealer

System Indicator*

vehicle is reduced.

immediately.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Models with paddle shifter

Blinks if the transmission system has a

problem and the paddle shifters cannot be

used.

Shift Up Indicator*

Comes on when shifting up is

2 Shift Up/Down Indicators P. 464

recommended.

Shift Down

Comes on when shifting down is

2 Shift Up/Down Indicators P. 464

Indicator*

recommended.

* Not available on all models
Indicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Blinks and the beeper sounds for a few

The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when

seconds if you are not wearing a seat belt

you and the passengers fasten their seat belts.

when you set the power mode to ON, then

Stays on after you and/or the passengers have

the indicator comes on.

fastened the seat belt(s) – A detection error may

If the front passenger is not wearing a seat

have occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle

belt, the indicator comes on a few seconds

checked by a dealer.

Seat Belt Reminder

later.

2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 46

Indicator

Comes on for a while when the rear seat

belt is unfastened while the power mode in

ON.

Blinks while driving if you and/or any

passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The

beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at

regular intervals.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 97

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on when the fuel reserve is running

Comes on – Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.

low (approximately 1.8 U.S. gal/7.0 Liter

Low Fuel Indicator

left).

Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel

Blinks – Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

gauge.

Comes on if there is a problem with the

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle checked

Anti-lock Brake

ABS.

by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still

System (ABS)

has normal braking ability but no anti-lock

Indicator

function.

2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 611

Comes on if a problem with any of the

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle checked

Supplemental

following is detected:

by a dealer.

– Supplemental restraint system

Restraint System

– Side airbag system

Indicator

– Side curtain airbag system

– Seat belt tensioner

98

Indicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle checked

Comes on if there is a problem with the

Electric Power

EPS system.

by a dealer.

Do not drive displays on the driver

Steering (EPS)

information interface – Immediately stop in a

System Indicator

safe place and contact a dealer.

2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Indicator Comes On P. 711

Blinks when VSA® is active.

Comes on if there is a problem with the

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle checked

Vehicle Stability

VSA® system, brake assist system, hill start

by a dealer.

assist system, starting assist brake

2 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka

AssistTM (VSA®)

function*, or agile handling assist.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

System Indicator

P. 481

Comes on if the VSA® system is deactivated

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

temporarily after the battery has been

The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your

disconnected, then re-connected.

vehicle checked by a dealer.

Vehicle Stability

Comes on when you partially disable VSA®.

2 VSA® On and Off P. 482

Comes on if the VSA® system is deactivated

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

AssistTM (VSA®)

OFF Indicator

temporarily after the battery has been

The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your

disconnected, then re-connected.

vehicle checked by a dealer.

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 99

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

May come on briefly if the power mode is

Comes on while driving – Stop in a safe place,

set to ON and the vehicle is not moved

check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if

within 45 seconds, to indicate the

necessary.

calibration process is not yet complete.

Stays on after the tires are inflated to the

Comes on and stays on when:

recommended pressures – The system needs to

U.S.

– One or more tires’ pressures are

be calibrated.

determined to be significantly low.

2 TPMS Calibration P. 485

models

– The system has not been calibrated.

Low Tire Pressure/

Blinks and remains on – Have your vehicle

TPMS Indicator

Blinks for about one minute, and then stays

on if there is a problem with the TPMS, or

checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a

when a compact spare tire is temporarily

compact spare tire, get your regular tire repaired or

installed.

replaced and put back on your vehicle as soon as

you can.

Comes on if the TPMS is deactivated

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

temporarily after the battery has been

The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your

disconnected, then re-connected.

vehicle checked by a dealer.

100

Indicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

• Does not blink or blinks rapidly

Turn Signal and

Blinks when you operate the turn signal

lever.

2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 660, 661

Hazard Warning

Blink along with all turn signals when you

Indicators

press the hazard warning button.

High Beam

Comes on when the high beam headlights

Indicator

are on.

Lights On Indicator

Comes on when the parking, tail, and

2 Light Switches P. 190

other external lights are on.

Fog Light

Comes on when the fog lights are on.

2 Fog Lights* P. 193

Indicator*

Auto High-Beam

Comes on when all the operating

2 Auto High-Beam P. 194

conditions of the auto high-beam are met.

Indicator

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 101

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on along with a beep when a

Refer to the Indicators information in this chapter

problem is detected. A system message on

when a system message appears on the driver

the driver information interface appears at

information interface. Take the appropriate action

the same time.

for the message.

Models with A-type meter

While the indicator is on, press the

(home)

button, and select Warnings to see the message

again.

System Message

2 Accessing contents in the display P. 116

The driver information interface will not return to

Indicator

the normal screen unless the warning is canceled,

or the

(home) button is pressed.

Models with B-type meter

While the indicator is on, roll the right selector

wheel to see the message again.

2 Switching the Display P. 143

The driver information interface will not return to

the normal screen unless the warning is canceled,

or the right selector wheel is rolled.

102

Indicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Models without drive mode switch

*1

ECON Mode

Comes on when the ECON mode is on.

2 ECON Button* P. 466

Models with drive mode switch

Indicator

2 Drive Mode Switch* P. 478

*2

Comes on when you set the drive mode to

ECON.

NORMAL Mode

Comes on when you set the drive mode to

2 Drive Mode Switch* P. 478

Indicator*

NORMAL.

Comes on when you set the drive mode to

Models with A-type meter

SPORT.

The ambient meter remains lit up in red as long as

SPORT mode is selected.

SPORT Mode

Models with B-type meter

Indicator*

The ambient meter goes off and gauges in the

instrument panel lit up in red as long as SPORT

mode is selected.

2 Drive Mode Switch* P. 478

Comes on when the engine coolant

If the indicator stays on after the engine has

Low Temperature

temperature is low.

reached normal operating temperature, there may

Indicator*

be a problem with the temperature sensors. Have

your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

*1:Models without drive mode switch

*2:Models with drive mode switch

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 103

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Blinks – You cannot start the engine. Set the

Models with

Blinks if the immobilizer system cannot

recognize the key information.

power mode to VEHICLE OFF, then select the ON

A-type meter

Indicator

mode again.

Canadian models

Depress and hold the brake pedal before setting

Immobilizer System

the power mode to ON.

Repeatedly blinks – The system may be

Models with

Indicator

malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked by a

B-type meter

dealer.

Indicator

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other

Blinks when the security system alarm has

devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.

Models with

been set.

A-type meter

Indicator

Security System

2 Security System Alarm P. 179

Models with

Alarm Indicator

B-type meter

Indicator

104

uuIndicatorsu

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Auto Idle Stop OFF

Comes on when the Auto Idle Stop system

has been turned off by the Auto Idle Stop

2 Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF P. 468

Indicator

OFF button.

● Blinks – Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Auto Idle Stop

Blinks if there is a problem with the Auto

System Indicator

Idle Stop system.

(Amber)

Auto Idle Stop

Comes on when Auto Idle Stop is in

operation. The engine automatically shuts

2 Auto Idle Stop P. 467

Indicator (Green)

off.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 105

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on while Auto Idle Stop is

temporarily suspended in the following

situations.

Continuously variable transmission models

Depress the brake pedal firmly.

– Brake pedal is not fully pressed

Continuously variable transmission models

– The transmission is in a position other than

(D

– System charging is prioritized

2 Auto Idle Stop P. 467

Auto Idle Stop

Climate control system is prioritized

Suspend Indicator

– Engine coolant temperature is not in

operating range

– SPORT mode* is selected.

2 Auto Idle Stop P. 467

2 Drive Mode Switch* P. 478

– The battery temperature is too low.

– Auto Idle Stop does not activate for some

2 Auto Idle Stop P. 467

reason.

If you press and hold the Auto Idle Stop OFF

button, you can select whether to display the status

messages or not.

* Not available on all models
Indicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on if there is a problem with ACC

Comes on while driving – Have your vehicle

with Low Speed Follow*.

checked by a dealer.

Comes on if the ACC with Low Speed

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Adaptive Cruise

Follow* is deactivated temporarily after the

The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your

battery has been disconnected, then re-

vehicle checked by a dealer.

Control (ACC) with

connected.

Low Speed Follow*

Indicator (Amber)

Indicator may come on temporarily when

Make sure the total load is within the Maximum

the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.

Load Limit.

ACC with Low Speed Follow* has been

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 445

automatically canceled.

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

Adaptive Cruise

Lights up in white when you press the

Control (ACC) with

button.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low

Low Speed Follow*

Lights up in green when you press the up

Speed Follow* P. 522

Indicator

or down the RES/+/SET/− switch.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 543

(White/Green)

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 107

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on if there is a problem with the

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle checked

Lane Keeping

LKAS.

by a dealer.

Indicator may come on temporarily when

Make sure the total load is within the Maximum

Assist System

(LKAS) Indicator

the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.

Load Limit.

(Amber)

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 445

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

Lane Keeping

Lights up in white when you press the LKAS

Assist System

button.

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 563

(LKAS) Indicator

Lights up in green when the LKAS is in

(White/Green)

operation.

Cruise Mode

Lights up in white when you change to

cruise mode.

2 To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to

Indicator

Lights up in green when you have set a

Cruise Control P. 540

(White/Green)

speed for cruise control.

Adaptive Cruise

Comes on when Adaptive Cruise Control

Each time you press the interval button, the

(ACC) with Low Speed Follow* indicator

following interval (the interval behind a vehicle

Control (ACC) with

comes on.

detected ahead of you) setting cycles through extra

Low Speed Follow*

long, long, middle, and short following intervals.

Interval Indicator*

2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 536

* Not available on all models
Indicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on if there is a problem with Road

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle checked

Departure Mitigation system, CMBSTM, Low

by a dealer.

Speed Braking Control* or blind spot

information system*.

Indicator may come on temporarily when

Make sure the total load is within the Maximum

the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.

Load Limit.

Safety Support

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 445

Indicator (Amber)

Stays on constantly – Have your vehicle checked

by a dealer.

Comes on if the Road Departure Mitigation

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20

system, CMBSTM and Low Speed Braking

km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not,

Control* are deactivated temporarily after

have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

the battery has been disconnected and

then re-connected.

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 109

Indicatorsu

Instrument Panel

 

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on when the Road Departure

Stays on – The temperature inside the camera is

Mitigation system and/or CMBSTM shuts

too high.

itself off.

Use the climate control system to cool down the

camera.

The system activates when the temperature inside

the camera cools down.

2 Front Wide View Camera P. 598

Safety Support

Stays on – The area around the camera is blocked

Indicator (Amber)

by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place

and wipe the debris off with a soft cloth.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the

indicator and message are still displayed even after

you have cleaned the area around the camera.

2 Front Wide View Camera P. 598

It may come on when the ambient conditions are

dark, such as when driving in a tunnel, or at night,

dawn, or dusk.

110

Indicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Remove the obstacle in the vicinity of the sonar

Models with Low Speed Braking Control

Comes on when mud, snow, or ice

sensor.

accumulates in the vicinity of the sonar

2 Low Speed Braking Control* P. 511, 517

sensor.

Comes on while driving – Something may be

Safety Support

Models with blind spot information system

Comes on when mud, snow, or ice

interfering with the blind spot information system

Indicator (Amber)

accumulates in the vicinity of the blind spot

sensor. Check the vicinity of the blind spot

information system sensor.

information system sensor and remove any

Comes on when the temperature of the

obstacles.

blind spot information system sensor is

The system will return to normal when the

high.

temperature cools down.

2 Blind Spot Information System* P. 491

Lights up in green when Road Departure

Mitigation system, CMBSTM, Low Speed

Braking Control* and blind spot

information system* are on.

2 Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off

Lights up in green and gray when Road

P. 587

Safety Support

Departure Mitigation system, CMBSTM, Low

Indicator (Green/

Speed Braking Control*, blind spot

2 Blind Spot Information System On and Off

P. 493

Gray)

information system* or any two or three of

2 System On and Off P. 514, 519

these systems are off.

2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 503

Lights up in gray when Road Departure

Mitigation system, CMBSTM, Low Speed

Braking Control* and blind spot

information system* are off.

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models 111

Gauges and Driver Information Interface

Instrument Panel

 

Gauges

 

Gauges include the speedometer, fuel gauge, and other related indicators.

They are displayed when the power mode is in ON.

Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.

Speedometer
You can set the speedometer and the displayed measurements to read in either km/h and mph.

2 Speed/Distance Units P. 128, 154

2 Settings P. 129

2 Customized Features P. 374

 

U.S. models with B-type meter

If you change the unit from miles and mph to km and km/h, the current vehicle speed in mph appears next to the digital speedometer.

Vehicle Speed in mph

112

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges
Tachometer
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

Models with B-type meter

 

Temperature Gauge
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

Odometer
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.

Tachometer

Models with A-type meter

The tachometer can be turned on and off using the driver information interface.

Settings P. 129
Even if you have turned off the tachometer on the driver information interface, if No content is selected on the driver information interface, it will change to a tachometer-only display.

1Fuel Gauge

NOTICE

You should refuel when the reading approaches E . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.

1Temperature Gauge

NOTICE

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull safely to the side of the road and allow engine temperature to return to normal.

Overheating P. 706
Instrument Panel

 

Continued 113

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges
Instrument Panel

 

Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

Adjusting the outside temperature display
Adjust the temperature reading by up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading seems incorrect.

Traffic Sign Recognition System
Shows traffic signs while driving.

The indicator blinks when the maximum speed of the traffic sign detected by the Traffic Sign Recognition System is exceeded.

Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 592
1Outside Temperature

 

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).

It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

You can adjust the temperature reading.

Settings P. 129
Customized Features P. 374
Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

 

114

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges
Current Mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow*, the LKAS, and Traffic Jam Assist*
Shows the current mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow*, LKAS, and traffic jam assist*.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow* P. 522
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 543
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 563
Traffic Jam Assist* P. 575
Models with A-type meter

 

Clock
Shows the clock.

You can adjust the time manually or change the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.

Clock P. 158
1Current Mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow*, the LKAS, and Traffic Jam Assist *

 

Models with B-type meter

When you set speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow* or cruise control, a set speed mark will be displayed on the speedometer.

Set

Speed

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models 115

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Models with A-type meter

 

Driver Information Interface

 

The driver information interface shows information such as the estimated travelable distance and fuel economy of the vehicle. It also displays messages such as warnings and other helpful information.

When a warning message displays, please check the message and contact a dealer and have the vehicle inspected if necessary. Please refer to the pages below if the Engine oil pressure low. or Engine temperature too hot. message is displayed.

If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears P. 708
Overheating P. 706
Switching the Display
Accessing contents in the display
Press the (home) button, then roll the left selector wheel to scroll to the content you want to see. Press the left selector wheel to see detailed information.

1Switching the Display

 

You can add or delete the meter contents.

Customize Display P. 127
116

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Left Selector

Wheel

(home) Button

Roll the left selector wheel.

Warnings

P. 128

No content

P. 128

Customize

display

P. 127

Settings

P. 129

Safety

Support

P. 125

Range & fuel

P. 118

Speed & time

P. 120

Driver

attention

P. 122

Seat belts

P. 125

Maintenance

P. 125

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 117

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Range / Fuel / Trip Meter
Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.

 

Average Fuel Economy

Range

Trip Meter A

Trip Meter B

Instant Fuel Economy

118

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Trip meter
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

Resetting a trip meter

To reset the trip meter, display it, press the left selector wheel and then select Reset.

u The trip meter is reset to 0.0.

Average fuel economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km. The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.

Instant fuel economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.

Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This estimated distance is based on the vehicle’s current fuel economy.

1Average fuel economy

 

You can change when to reset the average fuel economy.

Settings P. 129
1Range

The driving range displayed is only an estimate and may differ to the actual distance the vehicle can travel.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 119

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Speed & Time
Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.

 

Elapsed Time

Average Speed

Trip Meter A Trip Meter B

120

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Trip meter
2 Trip meter P. 119

Elapsed time
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

Average speed
Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

1Elapsed time

 

You can change when to reset the elapsed time.

Settings P. 129
1Average speed

You can change when to reset the average speed.

Settings P. 129
Instrument Panel

 

Continued 121

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Driver Attention Monitor
The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving. If it determines that the vehicle is being driven in such a manner, it will display the degree of the driver’s attention on the driver information interface.

 

Driver Information

Interface

Left Selector

Wheel

(home) Button

When you select Driver attention on the driver information interface, bars on it light up in white to indicate the degree of the driver’s attention.

 

Accessing contents in the display P. 116
1Driver Attention Monitor

 

The Driver Attention Monitor cannot always detect if the driver is tired or inattentive.

Regardless of the system’s feedback, if you are feeling tired, stop in a safe location and rest for as long as needed.

Level

122

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
If two bars light up, the Driver attention

 

level low message will appear.

If one bar lights up, the Driver attention

 

level low. Time for a break. message will

appear, a beep will sound, and the steering

wheel will vibrate.

If this message appears, stop in a safe location

and rest for as long as needed.

The message will disappear when the left

selector wheel is pressed or when the system

has determined that the driver is driving

normally.

If the driver does not take a break and the

monitor continues to detect that the driver is

very tired, the message will appear again after

approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a

beep and steering wheel vibrations.

The message does not appear when the

traveling time is 30 minutes or less.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 123

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

The Driver Attention Monitor resets when:
• The engine is turned off.

• The driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.

For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:
The vehicle must be traveling above 25 mph (40 km/h).
The electric power steering (EPS) system indicator must be off.
Depending on driving conditions or other factors, the Driver Attention Monitor may not function in the following circumstances:
The steering assist function of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 563

The condition of the road is poor, e.g. the surface is unpaved or bumpy.
It is windy.
The driver is frequently operating the vehicle in an assertive manner such as changing lanes or accelerating.
Customizing
You can change the Driver Attention Monitor settings. Select Tactile and audible alert, Tactile alert or OFF.

Settings P. 129
1For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:

 

The bars on the driver information interface remain grayed out unless the Driver Attention Monitor is functioning.

124

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Seat Belts
Appears when any of the seat belts are latched or unlatched.

Maintenance
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.

Maintenance MinderTM P. 635
Safety Support
Indicates the state of the Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBSTM, and blind spot information system* such as On, Off, or Failure, by color and letters.

The following colors indicate the state of any of the above mentioned systems:

Green: The system is on.
Gray: The system is off.
Amber: There is a problem with the system.
1Safety Support

 

If a system is indicated by the color amber, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

To turn on or off each system, first rotate the left selector wheel to switch displays. From the next display you can select which system to turn on or off.

Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off P. 587
Blind Spot Information System On and Off P. 493
CMBSTM On and Off P. 503
You can also confirm the state of each function by the color of the safety support indicator.

Safety Support Indicator (Amber) P. 109
Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray) P. 111
Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 125

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Instrument Panel

 

Area Info for CMBSTM

Area Info for

Road

Departure

Mitigation

System

Area Info for Blind spot information system*

Road

Departure

Mitigation

System Icon

and State Info

Blind spot

information

system Icon

and State

Info*

CMBSTM Icon

and State

Info

* Not available on all models
Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Customize Display
Change the settings to your liking.

Arrange content
You can choose which icons to display on the home screen.

Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select Customize display, then press the left selector wheel.
Roll the left selector wheel.

1Customize Display

 

Icons that are gray cannot be removed from the home screen.

Continuously variable transmission models

When you customize settings, shift to (P.

Manual transmission models

When you customize settings, set the parking brake.

Instrument Panel

 

Roll the left selector wheel to scroll between icons, then press the left selector wheel to check or uncheck them.

Continued 127

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Speed/Distance Units
Enables you to show another unit on the driver information interface and set the displayed measurements to read in either miles and km, mph and km/h.

 

Press and hold the left selector wheel when you select No content on the driver information interface. Each time you do this, the unit will change from miles and mph to km and km/h or vice versa. After this, a confirmation screen will appear for a few seconds.

Warnings
You can check if there are any active warning messages.

Warnings
If there are multiple warnings, you can roll the left selector wheel to see other warnings.

 

128

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Settings
Use the driver information interface to customize certain features.

How to customize
Press the (home) button, then select the Settings screen by rolling the left selector wheel while the power mode is in ON, the vehicle is at a complete stop, and the shift position is in P (continuously variable transmission) or the parking brake is set (manual transmission). Then, press the left selector wheel.

 

Driver Information Interface

(home) Button

Left Selector Wheel

Settings
To customize other features, roll the left selector wheel.

2 List of customizable options P. 130

2 Example of customization settings P. 136

 

Continuously variable transmission models

When you customize settings, shift to (P.

Manual transmission models

When you customize settings, set the parking brake.

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 129

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

List of customizable options
Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

TPMS

Calibrates the TPMS.

Cancel/Calibrate

calibration*

Forward collision

Changes the distance at which CMBSTM alerts.

Long/Normal*1/Short

warning distance

ACC forward vehicle

Causes the system to beep when the system detects a

vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ACC with Low

ON/OFF*1

detect beep

Speed Follow* range.

Driver assist

Road departure

Changes the setting for the Road Departure Mitigation

Narrow/Normal*1/Wide/

system setup

mitigation setting

system.

Warning only

Lane keeping assist

Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended.

ON/OFF*1

suspend beep

Blind spot

Changes the setting for the blind spot information.

Audible and visual

information*

alert*1/Visual alert

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models
Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Traffic sign

recognition system

Turns the traffic sign recognition system on and off.

ON*1/OFF

display setting

Traffic sign

recognition system

Turns the traffic sign recognition system over speed

ON*1/OFF

exceeding speed

warning on and off.

warning

Speed limit*1/

Driver assist

Speed limit+3mph/

system setup

Speed limit+5mph/

Speed limit+10mph

Speed limit warning

Changes the setting speed the traffic sign recognition

(When mph is selected)

threshold setting

system over speed warning is activated.

Speed limit*1/

Speed limit+5km/h/

Speed limit+10km/h/

Speed limit+15km/h

(When km/h is selected)

Driver attention

Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.

Tactile and audible

monitor

alert*1/ Tactile alert/OFF

*1:Default Setting

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 131

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Language selection

Changes the displayed language.

English*1/Français/

Español

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F

Adjust outside temp.

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

(U.S.)

display

-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C

(Canada)

“Trip A” reset timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,

When fully refueled/

average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed

IGN OFF/Manually reset*1

time A.

“Trip B” reset timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,

When fully refueled/

average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed

IGN OFF/Manually reset*1

Meter setup

time B.

Adjust alarm volume

Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers, warnings,

High/Mid*1/Low

turn signal sound, and so on.

Fuel efficiency backlight

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Rear seat reminder

Turns the Rear Seat Reminder feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

km/h∙km/mph∙miles*1

Speed/distance units

Selects the trip meter units.

(U.S.)

km/h∙km*1/mph∙miles

(Canada)

Tachometer

Selects whether the tachometer is displayed on the

ON*1/OFF

instrument panel.

*1:Default Setting

132

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Door unlock mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver’s

Driver door only*1/All

door handle.

doors

Keyless access light

Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/

ON*1/OFF

Keyless access

flash

lock the doors.

setup*

Keyless access beep

Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the

ON*1/OFF

doors.

Remote start system

Turns the remote engine start feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

ON/OFF*

Auto high-beam

Turns the auto high-beam on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Interior light dimming

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on

60sec/30sec*1/15sec

time

after you close the doors.

Headlight auto off

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on

60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec

Lighting setup

timer

after you close the driver’s door.

Auto light sensitivity*

Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.

Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Auto headlight ON

Changes the settings for the wiper operation when the

headlights automatically come on while the headlight

ON*1/OFF

with wiper ON

switch is in the AUTO position.

*1:Default Setting

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 133

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Changes the setting for when the doors

Auto door lock

 

automatically lock.

Continuously variable transmission models

With vehicle speed*1/Shift from P/OFF

Manual transmission models

 

With vehicle speed*1/OFF

Instrument Panel

Continuously variable transmission models

All doors when driver’s door opens*1/

All doors when shifted to Park/All

Auto door unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors

doors when ignition switched OFF/OFF

automatically unlock.

Manual transmission models

All doors when driver’s door opens*1/

All doors when ignition switched OFF/

Door setup

OFF

Key and remote unlock

Sets up either the driver’s door or all

doors to unlock on the first operation of

Driver door*1/All doors

mode

the keyless remote or built-in key.

Changes the settings for the automatic

Walk away auto lock*

locking the doors when you walk away

ON/OFF*1

from the vehicle while carrying the

keyless remote.

Keyless lock answer

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.

ON*1/OFF

back

LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

Keyless remote power

Turns remote window control using the

ON*1/OFF

window control

keyless remote on and off.

*1:Default Setting

134 * Not available on all models

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Door setup

Lockout prevention*

Changes the settings for the lockout

ON*1/OFF

protection function.

Maintenance

Resets the Maintenance Minder display

when you have performed the

(Selects Reset Items)

reset

maintenance service.

Cancels customized changes you have

Default all

made or restores them to their default

Cancel/Set

setting.

*1:Default Setting

 

Instrument Panel

 

* Not available on all models Continued 135

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Example of customization settings
The steps for changing the “Trip A” reset timing setting to When fully refueled

are shown below. The default setting for “Trip A” reset timing is Manually reset.

Press the (home) button to select Settings, then press the left selector wheel.

136

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Roll the left selector wheel until Meter setup appears on the display.
Press the left selector wheel.

u Language selection appears first in the

display.

Roll the left selector wheel until “Trip A” reset timing appears on the display, then press the left selector wheel.
u The display switches to the customization setup screen, where you can select When fully refueled, IGN OFF, Manually reset, or Back.

Roll the left selector wheel and select When fully refueled, then press the left selector wheel.
u The Selected appears, then the display returns to the customization menu screen.

 

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 137

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Instrument Panel

 

Press the left selector wheel after Back appears on the display.
Repeat Step 6 until you return to the normal screen.

138

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Left Side Area)
Models with B-type meter

 

Driver Information Interface (Left Side Area)

 

Shows the current mode for audio and phone information, etc.

Audio Remote Controls P. 244
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 421
Clock
Shows the clock.

You can adjust the time manually or change the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.

Clock P. 158
Clock
You can choose whether the clock is displayed on the driver information interface.

2 Customize Display P. 140

 

Instrument Panel

 

Continued 139

Gauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Left Side Area)
Instrument Panel

 

Customize Display
Arrange audio source on the left side area
You can choose which sources to display on the audio source screen.

Roll the left selector wheel, then roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select Customize display and press the left selector wheel.

1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri

 

Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri.

What movies are playing today?
Call dad at work.
What song is this?
How’s the weather tomorrow?
Read my latest email.
Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit

www.apple.com/ios/siri.

To adjust the guidance volume of Siri, turn the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob while Siri is

activated.

268

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

Android Auto

 

When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the USB port, Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on the screen.

We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android Auto.

USB Port(s) P. 241
Auto Pairing Connection P. 271
1Android Auto

 

We recommend that you update Android OS to the latest version when using Android Auto. Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used while your phone is connected to Android Auto.

To use Android Auto on a smartphone with Android 9.0 (Pie) or earlier, you need to download the Android Auto app from Google Play to your smartphone.

Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android Auto and when launching any compatible apps.

When your Android phone is connected to Android Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto is connected.

Phone Setup P. 406
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the same time.

Features

 

Continued 269

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Features

 

Android Auto Menu

Android Auto menu screen

Go back to the audio screen

Go back to the Android

CONNECT Button

Auto menu screen

Press to display Android Auto screen

Maps
Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs.

Phone
Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.

Exit

Operate Android Auto with your voice.

1Android Auto

 

For details on countries and regions where Android Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.

Screens may differ depending on the version of the Android Auto app you are using.

Android Auto Operating Requirements & Limitations

Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone with an active mobile connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android Auto functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android Auto functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.

To adjust the ring tone volume, the guidance volume of the navigation or voice recognition, or the audio volume, turn the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob while the sound you want to adjust is playing.

270

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

You can check Android notifications.

(Android Auto Home)
Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear just when they’re needed.

Auto Pairing Connection
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the USB port, Android Auto is automatically initiated.

Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port
To enable Android Auto after connecting an Android phone to the system, select Yes on the screen.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Settings menu.

1Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port

 

Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone.

You can use the following procedure to disconnect or delete the devices connecting Android Auto after you have completed the initial setup:

Press the MENU button 

Select Smartphone Settings  Android Auto  Select device

Use of user and vehicle information

The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is governed by the Google’s Privacy Policy.

Features

 

Continued 271

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Features

 

Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Press the (talk) button to operate Android Auto with your voice.

 

(Talk) Button:

Press to operate

Android Auto with your

voice.

Press again to deactivate

voice recognition.

1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition

 

Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition:

Reply to text.
Call my wife.
Navigate to Honda.
Play my music.
Send a text message to my wife.
Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android Auto homepage.

You can also activate the voice recognition function

by selecting the icon in the lower-right corner of the screen.

To adjust the guidance volume of voice recognition, turn the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob while the guidance is playing.

272

Audio System Basic Operation

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

 

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

(Back) Button

 

(Home) Button

/ (Seek/Track) Buttons

(Home) button: Press to go to the home

screen.

Using the audio/information screen P. 275
(Back) button: Press to go back to the

 

previous screen.

/ (Seek/Track) buttons: Press to

change songs.

 

Features

273

Audio System Basic OperationuStart Up
Features

 

Start Up

 

The 9-in. Color Touchscreen starts automatically when you set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON. At start-up, the following screen about the data upload will be displayed.

Select OK.

 

u If you want to change the settings for data upload, select Data Sharing, then select the ON/OFF settings on the Data Sharing Setting screen.

u If you do not select OK, the system will automatically be switched the home screen after a certain period of time.

u If there is no registered device, select OK

and the Bluetooth® pairing screen will be

displayed.

u If you check the box with Do not show

this again, this screen will not be

displayed.

To pair a cell phone (when there is no

phone paired to the system)

Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode.
Select Honda CIVIC from your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this
9-in. Color Touchscreen, select Search for Devices, and then select your phone when it appears on the list.

1Start Up

 

Data Sharing Setting

ON: Available the data communication.

OFF: Not available the data communication.

274

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen

 

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various setup options.

Switching the Display
Using the audio/information screen

Home Screen

Button

All Apps

Press the button to go to the home screen.

 

Select the following icons on the home screen or after selecting All Apps.

Phone
Displays the HFL information.

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 421
FM/AM/SiriusXM/USB/Bluetooth Audio Displays information for each audio format.
1Using the audio/information screen

 

Touchscreen operation

Use simple gestures – including touching, swiping and scrolling – to operate certain audio functions.
Some items may be grayed out during driving to reduce the potential for distraction.
You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or use voice commands.
Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen response.
You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.

Customized Features P. 374
Features

 

Continued 275

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

General Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.

2 Customized Features P. 374

Navigation
Displays the navigation screen.

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

HondaLink®
Displays the HondaLink screen.

2 HondaLink® P. 321

Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

Apple CarPlay P. 330
Android Auto P. 337
Vehicle Settings
Displays the vehicle settings screen.

Customized Features P. 374
276

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Trip Computer
Displays the trip computer information.

Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.
Trip A/Trip B tab: Displays information for the current and three previous drives. The information is stored every time you reset Trip A/B.
To reset the Trip A/B, select Settings, then select Delete Trip History.

To change the setting of how to reset Trip A/B, select Settings, then select “Trip A” Reset Timing or “Trip B” Reset Timing.

System Updates
Updates the software version of the audio system.

2 System Updates P. 286

Clock
Displays the clock.

Smart Shortcuts
Displays the Smart Shortcuts screen.

2 Smart Shortcuts P. 325

Display Mode
Displays the brightness bar.

Features

 

Continued 277

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

Import wallpaper
You can import up to 11 images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.

Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241

Press the button.
Select Clock.
Select Settings.
Select Clock Faces.
Select Add More.
u The image of the pictures stored in the USB flash drive are displayed on the list.

Select a desired picture to import.
u Multiple pictures can be selected at the same time.

Select OK.
u The selected pictures are displayed.

Select Transfer.
u It will return to the clock wallpaper setting screen.

 

1Wallpaper Setup

 

The wallpaper you set up on Clock Faces cannot be displayed on the driver information interface.

When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.

The file name must be less than 64 bytes.
The file format of the image that can be imported is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 10 MB.
The maximum image size is 4,096 × 2,304 pixels. If the image size is less than 1,280 × 720 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, the No files detected message appears.
278

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Select wallpaper
Press the button.
Select Clock.
Select Settings.
Select Clock Faces.
Select a desired picture to set.
u The preview is displayed on the screen.

Select Save.
u The clock screen which the wallpaper has been set is displayed.

To view wallpaper once it is set
1. Press the button.

2. Select Clock.

Delete wallpaper
Press the button.
Select Clock.
Select Settings.
Select Clock Faces.
Select Delete Photos.
Select a desired picture to delete.
u Multiple pictures can be selected at the same time.

Select OK.
u The selected pictures are displayed.

Select Delete.
u It will return to the clock wallpaper setting screen.

1Wallpaper Setup

 

You cannot delete the initial imported wallpapers.

Features

 

Continued 279

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

Home Screen
To move to the next screen
Swipe

Icon

Icon

>

<

Current page position

 

Selecting < or > , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.

1Home Screen

 

The home screen has 3 pages. You can add up to 6 pages.

Press the button to go directly back to the first page of the home screen from any page.

280

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
To add app icons on the home screen App icons can be added on the home screen.
Press the button.
Select All Apps.
Select the box checked on the desired apps.

1To add app icons on the home screen

 

Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this occurs, you need to reset the system.

Defaulting All the Settings P. 397
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all the settings to their factory default.

Defaulting All the Settings P. 397
In case those apps still do not start up normally even after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.

 

Features

Continued 281

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features

 

To move icons on the home screen You can change location on the home screen.
Press the button.
Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization screen.

 

Select and hold.

Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be.
Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home

screen.

Drag and drop.

1To move icons on the home screen

 

Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

282

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
To remove icons on the home screen You can delete the icons on the home screen.
Press the button.
Select and hold an icon.

u The screen switches to the customization screen.

1To remove icons on the home screen

 

You cannot delete the All Apps icon.

Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the home screen.

Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

Select and

hold.

Drag and drop to

the header area.

Drag and drop the icon you want to remove to the header area.
u The icon is removed from the home screen.

Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home

screen.

Features

 

Continued 283

Audio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
To shortcut icons on the home screen
You can store up to six icons on the bottom of the home screen.

1To shortcut icons on the home screen

 

Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

Features

 

Select and hold.

 

Shortcut

Icons

Drag and drop

to shortcut

icon.

Press the button.
Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization screen.

Drag and drop the icon you want to store to the bottom of the home screen.
u The icon is shortcut.

Select Done.
u The screen will return to the home screen.

284

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Status Area
Select the system status icon.

u The status area appears.

Select an item to see the details.
Press the button or select the system status icon to close the area.

System Status

Icon

 

Features

Status Area

285

Audio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Features

 

System Updates

 

The audio system’s firmware can be updated with a Wi-Fi connection, or with a USB device.

How to Update
When the audio system update is available, the notification is shown on the status area. Use the following procedure to update the system.

 

1. Press the

button.

Notification

 

2. Select System Updates.

u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.

u The system will check for updates. u If the update icon is appeared on the

home screen, select the status icon.

2 Status Area P. 285

Select Download.
u A notification appears on the screen if need to user acceptance for download.

Select Install Now or Install While Vehicle Off.
u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful.

1How to Update

 

You can update the system via Wi-Fi, but cannot use the captive portal that require login or agreement the terms of use on the browser.

Your download will be canceled if:

Your Wi-Fi connection is severed.
You stop the engine when the battery is low on power.
Your download will recommence the next time a Wi-Fi connection is established.

For the battery protection, Install While Vehicle Off cannot be selected when the battery is low on power. If you want to install the updated data, recharge the battery or select Install Now.

286

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

System Updates Settings
The following settings can be set.

 

Auto Download
Version Status
Connection Setup
Automatic Update*
Update History

Automatic download settings
Use the following procedure to change to the automatic download setting.

Press the button.
Select System Updates.

u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.

Select Settings.
Select Auto Download.
Select the access point, then select Allow.
u If you do not want to system update automatically, select Block.

View a version and update status
Use the following procedure to confirm the version and update status.

Press the button.
Select System Updates.

u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.

Select Settings.
Select Version Status.
* Not available on all models Continued

Features

287

Audio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Features

 

288

Connection setup
Use the following procedure to connect to the Internet via a Wi-Fi network.

Press the button.
Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.

Select Settings.
Select Connection Setup.
Select OK.
Select Change Mode.
Select Network.
u If the vehicle’s Wi-Fi is turned off, select OFF.

 

Automatic update settings*
Use the following procedure to change to the automatic update setting.

Press the button.
Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.

Select Settings.
Select Automatic Update.
Select Accept.
u If you do not want to system update automatically, select Decline.

 

View the update history
Use the following procedure to confirm the update history.

Press the button.
Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.

Select Settings.
Select Update History.

* Not available on all models

How to Update Wirelessly
Wireless connection mode setup
Press the button.
Select System Updates.

u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.

Select Settings.
Select Connection Setup.
Select OK.
Select Change Mode.
Select Network.
u It will return to the network list.

Select an access point from the network list.
u If the audio system requires a password, enter a password.

Select Connect.
How to update
Press the button.
Select System Updates.

u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.

Select via Wireless.
Select Download.
u A notification appears on the screen if need to user acceptance for download.

5. Select Install Now or Install While Vehicle Off.

u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful.

Audio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

Features

Continued 289

Audio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
Features

 

How to Update with a USB Device
Download the update files from the server
Press the button.
Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps.

Select Other Methods.
Select Via USB.
u A notification appears on the screen.

Connect a USB device into the USB port.
u The inventory data is copied into the USB device.

2 USB Port(s) P. 241

Remove the USB device from the USB port.
Connect the USB device into your computer, and then download the update files. u Follow the link to download the required software update files. Refer to
https://usb.honda.com for instructions.

 

Update the audio system
Press the button.
Select System Updates.
Select Other Methods.
Select Via USB.
u A notification appears on the screen.

Connect the USB device with the update files into the USB port. u A notification appears on the screen.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241

Select Install Now.
u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful.

 

1How to Update with a USB Device

 

A USB device with a minimum of 8 GB of free space or more is recommended.

Be sure to delete any previous inventory or update files from the USB before starting the USB update process.

290

Audio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Adjusting the Sound

 

Press the button.
Select an audio source icon.
Select Sound.

Select an item from the following choices:

Bass / Treble: Treble, Midrange, Bass
Audio Zones & Balance / Fader: Driver Only, Front Only, Rear Only, Full Vehicle, Balance, Fader
Bose Centerpoint: Bose Centerpoint
Bose Dynamic Speed Compensation: Bose Dynamic Speed Compensation

1Adjusting the Sound

 

The Bose Dynamic Speed Compensation adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.

You can also adjust the sound by the following procedure.

Press the button.
Select General Settings.
Select Sound.
Audio Zones & Balance / Fader

You can change where the sound comes from by selecting one of the speaker options below:

Full Vehicle: All the speakers emit sound.
Driver Only: Only the speaker by the driver’s seat emits sound.
Front Only: Only the front speakers emit sound.
Rear Only: Only the rear speakers emit sound.
To reset each setting for Bass / Treble, Audio Zones

Balance / Fader, and Bose Dynamic Speed Compensation, select Default on each setting screen.
Features

 

291

Audio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features

 

Display Setup

 

You can set the screen brightness.

Switching Display Mode Manually
Select Display Mode.

 

u The brightness bar is displayed for a few seconds.

u Select or to adjust the brightness. u Select Display OFF to turn off the

screen. To turn on the screen, press the

or button.

1Display Setup

 

You can adjust the screen brightness by sliding or tapping on the brightness bar.

You can also change the screen brightness on the following procedures.

Press the button.
Select General Settings.
Select Display.
Select the setting you want.
To reset the settings, select Default.

292

Selecting an Audio Source

Select Audio Source Source Select Screen

Source List Icons

Select Audio Source on the header area, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Audio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Features

293

Audio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features

 

Voice Control Operation

 

Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation.

The voice control system uses the (Talk) button on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.

Voice Recognition
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system:

Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are using.
The system recognizes only certain commands. Available voice commands:

2 Voice Portal Screen P. 295

Close the windows and moonroof.
Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone on the ceiling.
Speak clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
1Voice Control Operation

 

When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command.

1Voice Recognition

The voice control system can only be used from the driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes noises from the front passenger’s side.

294

Audio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Voice Portal Screen

When the (talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen.

For a complete list of commands, say “Help” after the beep.

Depending on the selected mode, the displayed commands are different on the voice portal screen. The commands recognized are the same regardless of which screen is selected.

Normal Mode: A list of example commands is displayed to quickly complete your desired function.

Assist Mode: A list of basic commands is displayed to guide you step by step through the voice menu.

You can change the mode on the General Settings screen.

Voice Control P. 385
The system only recognizes the commands on the following pages, at certain screens. Free form voice commands are not recognized.

General Commands
When the voice portal screen is displayed, it will change to the top screen of each function by using the global commands.

Music Search
AM
FM
Sirius XM
Navigation
Phone
Phone Commands
This can only be used when the phone is connected. When the system recognizes the Phone command, the screen will change the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone.

Phone Commands
• Call <name>

• Call <number>

The system recognizes an only contact name in the stored phonebook of your phone. If full name is registered in first name field, the system will recognize the first name and last name as one contact name.

Phone commands are not available if using Apple CarPlay.

Audio Commands

When the system recognizes the Audio command, the screen will change the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio.

FM Commands
Tune to <FM frequency>
AM Commands
Tune to <AM frequency>
Sirius XM Commands
Tune to SXM <channel number>
Tune to SXM <station name>
Features

 

Continued 295

Audio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Features

 

iPod Commands
• List Album <name>

• List Artist <name>

• List Genre <name>

• List Playlist <name>

• Play <artist> <album>

• Play

• Play Album <name>

• Play Artist <name>

• Play Genre <name>

• Play Music <text:media_combo>

• Play Playlist <name>

• Play Song <name>

USB Commands
List Album <name>
List Artist <name>
List Playlist <name>
Play <artist> <album>
Play
Play Album <name>
Play Artist <name>
Play Music <text:media_combo>
Play Playlist <name>
Play Song <name>
Navigation Commands
The screen changes to the navigation

screen.

Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Standard Commands
Voice Help
Cancel
Back
Voice Help are readout voice guidance for

Help on current screen.

List Commands
Previous
Next
Yes
No
296

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

 

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Seek Buttons

Press or to search the selected band up or down for a station with a strong signal.

Audio/Information Screen

Settings Icon

Select whether to tune to HD

RadioTM automatically.

Preset Icons

Tune the radio frequency for preset memory.

Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select > to display beyond preset 5.

Scan Icon

Select to scan each station with a strong signal.

Tune Icon

Select to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the radio frequency directly.

Features

 

Continued 297

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Preset Memory
To store a station:

Tune to the selected station.
Select and hold the preset icon to store that station.
u Selecting Press & Hold can be set a new preset station.

Station List
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band.

Select Station List to display a list.
2. Select the station.

 

Features

■ Manual update

Updates your available station list at any time.

1.

Select Station List to display a list.

2.

Select Refresh.

1Preset Memory

 

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode

Roll the left selector wheel or select Audio Source on the screen.

Audio Remote Controls P. 244
You can store 12 AM/FM stations into preset memory.

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see http://dts.com/patents. HD Radio, Artist Experience, and the HD, HD Radio, and “ARC” logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

298

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn

off scan, select Stop or press the button.

 

HD Subchannel
Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to an FM station.

Select HD Radio Channels.
Select the channel number.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

To find an RDS station from Station List
Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.
Select the station.
Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.

Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station.
Select Refresh.
1Radio Data System (RDS)

 

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.

Features

 

Continued 299

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
AM/FM Settings
Change the AM/FM settings.

Select Settings.
Select an option.
HD Radio: Automatically choose a digital or an analog channel, or listen to analog only.
Artwork: Turns the artwork display on and off.

Features

300

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Playing SiriusXM® Radio

 

Album Art

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Seek Buttons

Press or to search the selected band up or down for a station with a strong signal.

Audio/Information Screen

Settings Icon

Select settings to display and customize SiriusXM® settings.

Preset Icons

Tune the radio frequency for preset memory.

Select and hold the preset icon to store

that station. Select > to display beyond preset 5.

Category Icons

Select or to display and select a SiriusXM® Radio category.

Channel Icons

Select or to the previous or next channel.

Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time.

Features

 

Continued 301

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
To Change the Tune Mode
Select Settings.
Select Tune Mode.
Select Channel or Category.

Features

1Playing SiriusXM® Radio

 

In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.

SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order, which can take about a minute. Once they have loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make your selections.

Switching the Audio Mode

Roll the left selector wheel or select Audio Source on the screen.

Audio Remote Controls P. 244
Tune Start:

When you change to a preset channel, a song being played on that channel restarts from the beginning with this function. This can be turned on or off by the following procedure.

Select Settings.
Select Tune Start.
Select ON or OFF.
To change a category, select Category icons, or select More and then select Category List.

302

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Preset Memory
To store a channel:

Tune to the selected channel.
Select and hold the preset icon to store that channel.
u Selecting Press & Hold can be set a new preset channel.

Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
You can store up to 10 of your preferred music channels per preset.

Tune a station.
Select and hold the preset number you

want to add a music channel.

3. Select Add to TuneMix or Create TuneMix.

u A message appears if there are no available presets.

1Playing SiriusXM® Radio

 

You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset memory.

1Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)

TuneMix:

The multi-channel preset function can be turned on or off by the following procedure.

Select Settings.
Select TuneMix.
Select ON or OFF.
When you want to replace the channel, select Replace Preset.

If you want to delete a channel, select Edit TuneMix, and then select the channel you want to delete.

Features

 

Continued 303

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Listening to Featured Channels
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected.

Select More.
Select Category List.
Select Featured Favorites.
Select the featured favorite list title you want to listen to. u The selected channel list of the title is displayed.
Select the channel.

1Listening to Featured Channels

 

Up to 10 featured channels by SiriusXM® can be displayed.

To switch the sorting method, select Number or Name on the upper right of the screen.

Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the channel number directly.

Features

304

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Replay Function
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes of your currently tuned channel’s broadcast, as well as the last 30 minutes of your preset channel’s broadcast, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to a preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.

Move the position you want to replay by selecting or .

To play or pause on playback mode, select the play/pause icon.

Returning to real-time broadcast
Select and hold .

1Replay Function

 

The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to the program from that point.

You can no longer replay any program once the power mode is turned off as it erases memory. You can check how long the program has been stored in memory from the audio/information screen.

After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will automatically start deleting the oldest data.

Audio/Information Screen

(A)

(C) (D) (B)

(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast (B): Replayed segment

(C): Length stored in memory

(D): Play/Pause icon

When you listen a multi-channel preset while at the playback mode, the replayed segment is not displayed.

Features

 

Continued 305

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Features

 

Live Sports Alert
While listening to other channels, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from the games of your favorite teams.

To set up a favorite team
Select Settings.
Select Sports Notifications Setup.
Select Favorite Teams.
Select + Add Favorite Team.
Select a team.

1Live Sports Alert

 

The Pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert function.

To set up an alert message
Select Settings.
Select Sports Notifications Setup.
Select Notifications.
Select Game Notifications or SportsFlash Game Play Notifications.
Select Notifications.
Select ON.
Select a favorite team.
Receiving a sports alert
A pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert.
Select Listen.
u You can use the same items as the playback mode pop-up screen.

2 Replay Function P. 305

To go back to the previous screen, select .

306

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Traffic and Weather Information
You can receive traffic and weather information.

To set up a traffic & weather information
Select Settings.
Select Traffic & Weather Now Setup.
Select Selected City.
Select the region.
u When you do not want to receive the information, select No Market Selected.

Listening a traffic and weather information
1. Select the status icon.

2. Select the traffic and weather information.

u Play mode can also use the any items same as playback mode.

2 Replay Function P. 305

To go back to the previous screen, select .

1Traffic and Weather Information

 

When traffic and weather information is received, a notification is displayed in the header area.

Status Area P. 285
Traffic & Weather Now are registered trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.

Features

 

Continued 307

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Channel Schedule
1Channel Schedule

 

You can view a channel schedule or receive an alert when your favorite program is about to start.

To view a channel schedule
1. Select More.

 

2. Select Channel Schedule.

 

Features

To set up an alert message
Select More.
Select Channel Schedule.
Select a program.
Select Set Program Alert.
Select Just Once or Every Time.
Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the channel number directly.

1To set up an alert message

The Pop-up appears and notifies you of an alert function.

Selecting Just Once disables the alert feature next time you turn the power mode to ON.

If you want to delete the alert, select Remove Alert.

To enable an alert message, change settings for the alert function.

To enable the alert function P. 309
308

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Manage Program Alert
You can change settings for the alert function.

To enable the alert function
Select Settings.
Select Manage Program Alerts.
Select Notifications.
Select ON or OFF.

To remove an alert
Select Settings.
Select Manage Program Alerts.
Select Alerts Set.
Select on the alert you want to delete.

Features

 

Continued 309

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Scan
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds.

Select More.
Select Scan.
You can change a scan mode by the following procedure.

Select Settings.
Select Scan Mode.
Select Channel or Preset.

Scan
The “Scan Songs in Presets” function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM®.

The “Featured Channels” function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM®.

TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.

 

To turn off scan, select Stop.

Features

310

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
SiriusXM® Settings
Change the SiriusXM® settings.

Select Settings.
Select an option.
TuneMix: Turns multiple channel mix preset on and off.
Tune Mode: Choose whether to group by category or channel number when changing channels.
2 To Change the Tune Mode P. 302

Scan Mode: Select the scan mode from all channels or presets.
Scan P. 310
Tune Start: Start the currently playing song at the beginning when you switch to a music channel preset.
Tune Start: P. 302
Sports Notifications Setup: Set to receive sports alerts such as scores from your favorite teams.
Live Sports Alert P. 306
Traffic & Weather Now Setup: Set to receive traffic and weather information.
Traffic and Weather Information P. 307
Manage Program Alerts: Change settings for the alert function.
Manage Program Alert P. 309
Features

 

311

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Playing an iPod

 

Using your USB connector, connect the iPod to the USB port, then select the USB mode.

USB Port(s) P. 241

Features

 

Cover Art

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Track Buttons

Press or to change songs.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.

Browse Icon

Select to display the menu items.

Audio/Information Screen

Shuffle Icon

Select to play all files in the current category in random order.

Repeat Icon

Select to repeat the current file.

Play/Pause Icon

Track Icons

Select or to change songs.

Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.

312

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Select Browse.

2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists, Albums, etc.).

Continue making selections until you find the song of your choice.
1Playing an iPod

 

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 343
If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod while the phone is connected to the audio system, you may no longer be able to operate the same app on the audio/information screen. Reconnect the device if necessary.

If an iPhone or a smartphone is connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, the iPod/USB source will be unavailable and audio files on the phone will be playable only within Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

Features

 

Continued 313

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features

 

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.

Shuffle/Repeat

Select shuffle or repeat icon repeatedly until a desired mode.

Repeat Icon

Shuffle Icon

To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.

1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Shuffle

Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off.

Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.

Repeat

Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.

Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.

Repeat all: Repeats the all songs.

314

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,

WMA, AAC*1, FLAC, or WAV format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.

USB Port(s) P. 241

(Back) Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Track Buttons

Press or to change files.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a track.

Browse Icon

Select to display the menu items.

Audio/Information Screen

Random Icon

Select to play all files in the current category in random order.

Repeat Icon

Select to repeat the current file.

Play/Pause Icon

Track Icons

Select or to change files.

Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.

Features

 

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.

Continued 315

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
Select Browse.

2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists, Albums, etc.).

Continue making selections until you find the song of your choice.

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

 

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

General Information on the Audio System P. 345
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.

iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 343
Features

316

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat, and random modes when playing a file.

Random/Repeat

Select random or repeat icon repeatedly until a desired mode.

Repeat Icon

Random Icon

To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.

1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Random

Random off: Random mode to off.

Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random

order.

Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order.

Repeat

Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.

Repeat track: Repeats the current file.

Repeat folder: Repeats all files in the current

folder.

Features

 

317

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

Phone Setup P. 426

Audio/Information Screen

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

 

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones:

U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.
Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
Features

 

(Back) Button

Press to go back

to the previous

display.

VOL/ AUDIO

(Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio

system on and off.

Turn to adjust the

volume.

Browse Icon

Select to display the menu items.

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your phone

is connected to HFL.

Shuffle Icon

Select to play all files in the current category in random order.

Repeat Icon

Select to repeat the

current track.

Play/Pause Icon

Track Icons

Select or to change tracks. Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.

It may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the system automatically connects to the prioritized phone. You can assign priority to a phone in the Bluetooth® device list.

Phone Setup P. 426
The connected phone for Bluetooth® Audio can be different.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.

Some functions may not be available on some devices.

If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone is unavailable. However, a second previously paired phone can stream Bluetooth® Audio by selecting from the Bluetooth® device list.

Phone Setup P. 426
318

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
Make sure that your phone is paired and

connected to the system.

2 Phone Setup P. 426

2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.

To play or pause a file Select the play/pause icon.
Searching for Music
Select Browse.

2. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).

Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

 

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

You can change the connected phone by selecting Change Device.

Phone Setup P. 426
1Searching for Music

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

Features

 

Continued 319

Audio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features

 

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.

Shuffle/Repeat

Select shuffle or repeat icon repeatedly until a desired mode.

Repeat Icon

Shuffle Icon

To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.

1How to Select a Play Mode

 

Play Mode Menu Items

Shuffle

Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off.

Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in a selected list in random order.

Repeat

Repeat off: Repeat mode to off.

Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.

Repeat Group: Repeats the current group.

Repeat all: Repeats the all songs.

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the functions may not be displayed.

320

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

HondaLink®

 

HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.

Wi-Fi Connection P. 328
Phone Setup P. 426
HondaLink® Menu

HondaLink®
The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data subscription package.

If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, HondaLink® can only be connected through Wi-Fi.

 

Features

Connect
Displays the connection status of the vehicle.

Help & Support
Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service center.

Message
Displays helpful and important information from Honda.

Continued 321

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features

 

To Set Up to Connect HondaLink® Service
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink® service.

To enable the HondaLink® service
Press the button.
Select General Settings.
Select System.
Select Data Sharing Setting.
Select ON.
To link with HondaLink®

You can see the connection guide screen after

 

launching HondaLink® when there is no

connection to a network. If you do not need

this guide, select check-box and select OK.

322

Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation.

A notification appears and notifies you of a new message on the header area.

Notification

2. A notification icon is continuously displayed in the header area until the new message is read.

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

Features

Continued 323

Audio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Features

 

Select the system status icon to see the messages.

Select a new message to open.
324

Audio System Basic OperationuSmart Shortcuts
Smart Shortcuts

 

By observing and learning driver behaviors, patterns, and preferences, the system anticipates driver actions and presents on-screen suggestions to help perform desired actions quicker and with fewer steps.

The app will suggest actions based on what it learns you do often, and occasionally make recommendations based on your learned preferences.
The system will take some time to learn. The more you interact with the system, the more suggestion you will see, and the more accurate they will become.
Suggestions will automatically refresh periodically to provide updated content for each profile.
You can also provide feedback on whether a suggestion is helpful by pressing and holding on it. This can help the app grow smarter over time.

Smart Shortcuts Screen Shortcut Suggestion

To change the notifications behavior for Smart Shortcuts:
1. Select Options on the Smart Shortcuts screen.

2. Select Suggestion Settings.

3. Select an option.

All data used for Smart Shortcuts can be erased by a Factory Data Reset.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 397

1Smart Shortcuts

 

The app also supports different profiles for each user, with customized learning for each profile. The app will also learn to associate a profile to a user over time based on key fob and connected phone data.

Features

 

Continued 325

Audio System Basic OperationuSmart Shortcuts
Features

 

How to Use
Press the button.
Select Smart Shortcuts.

3. Select a shortcut to take the action suggested.

Call Suggestions: When selected, a call to the contact or number suggested will be placed and shown. Based on your calling patterns, contacts will be suggested for you to call.
u Connect your smartphone through Bluetooth® to get contact suggestions. u Call suggestions will not be displayed when you are connected to Apple

Carplay.

Navigation Suggestions: When selected, a route will be started to the suggested destination and the embedded navigation app will open.
u When a long route is set in your navigation system, you can receive recommendations for gas stations and places to stop at along the way.

u The places you frequently navigate to while using the embedded navigation system will be suggested as shortcuts.

u Save your home location in the embedded navigation app to have a shortcut suggestion for it when you’re away from home.

1How to Use

 

You can change the profile by selecting on the top of the Smart Shortcuts screen.

You can customize the following items by selecting Options on the top of the Smart Shortcuts screen.

Profiles: Create, change, and manage profiles.
View App Walkthrough: View the Smart Shortcuts walkthrough.
Suggestion Settings: Change where suggestions can appear.
To create a profile:

Select Options on the Smart Shortcuts screen.
Select Profiles.
Select Manage Profiles.
Select + Add New Profile.
Enter name for your profile.
Select Done.
uA new profile has been created and the Smart App will automatically switch to that profile.

To change a profile:

Select Options on the Smart Shortcuts screen.
Select Profiles.
Select Change Current Profile.
Select a profile from the list.
uThe change to the selected profile has been made.

326

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSmart Shortcuts

Radio Suggestions: When selected, the corresponding radio app (FM, AM, or SiriusXM®) will open and it will start playing the station.
u From radio apps you can receive:

FM, AM, SiriusXM®: Most frequently listened stations you may like to play next.
FM, SiriusXM®: Genre-based suggestions.
Considerations:
FM suggestions will appear only when they are within range, according to your vehicle’s tuner signal.
SiriusXM® suggestions will be available as long as there is an active account in
the vehicle.

 

Features

327

Audio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Features

 

Wi-Fi Connection

 

This vehicle is equipped with Wi-Fi connectivity. You can connect to an external Wi-Fi hotspot or communication device.

Connect the vehicle to a Wi-Fi hotspot
Press the button.
Select General Settings.
Select Connections.
Select Wi-Fi.

5. Select OK.

6. Select Change Mode.

Select Network.
u If the data sharing settings is to OFF, the message will be displayed on the screen. You need to change to ON.

2 Customized Features P. 374

u If you want to turn off the Wi-Fi mode, select OFF.

1Wi-Fi Connection

 

Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

1Connect the vehicle to a Wi-Fi hotspot

You cannot go through the setting procedure while the vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to set the audio system in Wi-Fi mode.

Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data subscription package.

Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi-Fi connectivity.

You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or

off with the icon on the system status area. Transmission speed and others will not be displayed on this screen.

328

Audio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Select the access point you want to connect to the system.
u To add a new network or select the saved networks, select Options.

u If Options is selected, Add Network and Saved Networks can be registered.

 

Features

329

Audio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay

 

If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the 2.5A USB port or wirelessly, you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.

USB Port(s) P. 241
Apple CarPlay Menu

1Apple CarPlay

 

We recommend that you update iOS to the latest version when using Apple CarPlay.

We recommend using the latest OS.

Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible apps.

Features

 

Home screen

Apple CarPlay icon

Apple CarPlay menu screen

Go back to the

home screen

: Go back to the Apple CarPlay Dashboard screen

: Go back to the

Apple CarPlay menu

screen

To directly access the Apple CarPlay phone function, select Phone on the home screen. While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a call with HandsFreeLink, turn Apple CarPlay OFF.

Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 332
When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlay is connected.

Phone Setup P. 426
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the same time.

For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

330

Audio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Phone
Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail.

Messages
Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.

Music
Play music stored on your iPhone.

Maps
Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone.

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.

1Apple CarPlay

 

Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements & Limitations

Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps.

Features

 

Continued 331

Audio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Features

 

Setting Up Apple CarPlay
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the 2.5A USB port or wirelessly, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/ information screen.

Connecting Apple CarPlay Using the USB Cable to the USB Port
Connect the iPhone to the USB port using the USB cable.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241

u The confirmation screen will be displayed.

Select Yes.
u If you do not want to connect Apple CarPlay, select No.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Connection settings menu.

1Setting Up Apple CarPlay

 

Only initialize Apple CarPlay when you are safely parked.

When Apple CarPlay first detects your iPhone, you will need to set up your iPhone. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your iPhone.

You can use the following procedure to disconnect or delete the devices connecting Apple CarPlay:

Press the buttonSelect General Settings Smartphone ConnectionApple CarPlay Select device

Use of user and vehicle information

The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apple’s Privacy Policy.

332

Connect Apple CarPlay Wirelessly
Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the home screen
Press the button.
Select Smartphone Connection.
Select + Connect New Device.
Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 426

Select Yes.
u If your iPhone asks to accept for connecting Apple CarPlay, accept for

connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.

Select Yes or No.
Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the Apple CarPlay device list
1. Press the button.

2. Select General Settings.

3. Select Smartphone Connection.

4. Select Apple CarPlay.

5. Select + Connect New Device.

6. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 426

7. Select Yes.

u If your iPhone asks to accept for connecting Apple CarPlay, accept for

connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears. 8. Select Yes or No.

Audio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

Features

Continued 333

Audio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Features

 

Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the Bluetooth® device list
Press the button.
Select General Settings.
Select Connections.
Select Bluetooth.
Select + Connect New Device.
Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 426

Check the box on Apple CarPlay.
u If you select Apple CarPlay, you cannot select Audio and Phone.

Select Connect.
Select Yes.
u If your iPhone asks to accept for connecting Apple CarPlay, accept for

connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.

Select Yes or No.
Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly with the steering wheel
Press and hold the (talk) button on the steering wheel.
Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 426

Check the box on Apple CarPlay.
u If you select Apple CarPlay, you cannot select Audio and Phone.

Select Connect.
Select Yes.
u If your iPhone asks to accept for connecting Apple CarPlay, accept for

connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.

Select Yes or No.
334

Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly at start-up (when there is no phone
paired to the system)

Set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON.
Select OK.
u If there is no registered device, the Bluetooth® pairing screen will be displayed. u If you check the box with Do not show this again, this screen will not be

displayed.

Pair the iPhone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 426

Check the box on Apple CarPlay.
u If you select Apple CarPlay, you cannot select Audio and Phone.

Select Connect.
Select Yes.
u If your iPhone asks to accept for connecting Apple CarPlay, accept for

connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.

Select Yes or No.
Audio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

Features

Continued 335

Audio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Features

 

Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
Press and hold the talk button to activate Siri.

 

(Talk) Button:

Press and hold to activate Siri.

Press again to deactivate Siri.

Press and release to activate

standard voice recognition

system.

1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri

 

Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri.

What movies are playing today?
Call dad at work.
What song is this?
How’s the weather tomorrow?
Read my latest email.
Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit

www.apple.com/ios/siri.

336

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

Android Auto

 

When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the USB port or wirelessly, Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on the screen.

We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android Auto.

USB Port(s) P. 241
Auto Pairing Connection P. 338
Android Auto Menu

Home screen Android Auto menu screen

Go back to the

Android Auto icon

home screen

Go back to the Android

Auto menu screen

1Android Auto

 

We recommend that you update Android OS to the latest version when using Android Auto. Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used while your phone is connected to Android Auto.

To use Android Auto on a smartphone with Android 9.0 (Pie) or earlier, you need to download the Android Auto app from Google Play to your smartphone.

Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android Auto and when launching any compatible apps.

When your Android phone is connected to Android Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto is connected.

Phone Setup P. 426
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the same time.

Features

 

Continued 337

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Features

 

Maps
Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs.

Phone
Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.

Exit

Operate Android Auto with your voice.

You can check Android notifications.

(Android Auto Home)
Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear just when they’re needed.

Auto Pairing Connection
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the USB port or wirelessly, Android Auto is automatically initiated.

1Android Auto

 

For details on countries and regions where Android Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.

Screens may differ depending on the version of the Android Auto app you are using.

Android Auto Operating Requirements & Limitations

Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone with an active mobile connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android Auto functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android Auto functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto performance or functionality.

It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.

338

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port
Connect the Android phone to the USB port using the USB cable.
2 USB Port(s) P. 241

u The confirmation screen will be displayed.

Select Yes.
u If you do not want to connect Android Auto, select No.

You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Connection settings menu.

Connect Android Auto Wirelessly
Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the home screen
Press the button.
Select Smartphone Connection.
Select + Connect New Device.
Pair the Android phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 426

Select Yes.
u If your Android phone asks to accept for connecting Android Auto, accept for connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.

Select Yes or No.
1Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port

 

Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone.

You can use the following procedure to disconnect or delete the devices connecting Android Auto after you have completed the initial setup:

Select General Settings 

Smartphone Connection  Android Auto  Select device

Use of user and vehicle information

The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is governed by the Google’s Privacy Policy.

Features

 

Continued 339

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Features

 

Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the Android Auto device list
Press the button.
Select General Settings.
Select Smartphone Connection.
Select Android Auto.
Select + Connect New Device.
Pair the Android phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 426

Select Yes.
u If your Android phone asks to accept for connecting Android Auto, accept for connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.

Select Yes or No.
Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the Bluetooth® device list
Press the button.
Select General Settings.
Select Connections.
Select Bluetooth.
Select + Connect New Device.
Pair the Android phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 426

Check the box on Android Auto.
u If you select Android Auto, you cannot select Audio and Phone.

Select Connect.
Select Yes.
u If your Android phone asks to accept for connecting Android Auto, accept for connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.

Select Yes or No.
340

Connect Android Auto wirelessly with the steering wheel
1. Press and hold the (talk) button on the steering wheel.

2. Pair the Android phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2 Phone Setup P. 426

3. Check the box on Android Auto.

u If you select Android Auto, you cannot select Audio and Phone.

4. Select Connect.

5. Select Yes.

u If your Android phone asks to accept for connecting Android Auto, accept for connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.

6. Select Yes or No.

Connect Android Auto wirelessly at start-up (when there is no phone
paired to the system)

Set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON.
Select OK.
u If there is no registered device, the Bluetooth® pairing screen will be displayed. u If you check the box with Do not show this again, this screen will not be

displayed.

Pair the Android phone to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 426

Check the box on Android Auto.
u If you select Android Auto, you cannot select Audio and Phone.

Select Connect.
Select Yes.
u If your Android phone asks to accept for connecting Android Auto, accept for connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.

Select Yes or No.
Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

Features

Continued 341

Audio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Features

 

Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Press and hold the (talk) button to operate Android Auto with your voice.

 

(Talk) Button:

Press and hold to operate

Android Auto with your voice.

Press and release to activate

standard voice recognition

system.

1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition

 

Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition:

Reply to text.
Call my wife.
Navigate to Honda.
Play my music.
Send a text message to my wife.
Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android Auto homepage.

You can also activate the voice recognition function

by selecting the icon in the lower-right corner of the screen.

342

Audio Error Messages

iPod/USB Flash Drive

 

If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message

Solution

Bad USB Device

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn

the audio system off and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the

Please check owners manual*1

error.

Connect Retry*1, *2

Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

Unplayable File*1, *2

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are copyright protected or an unsupported

format. This error message appears for about a few seconds, then plays the next file.

iPod

Appears when the iPod is empty.

USB flash drive

No Data*1, *2

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or

WAV files in the USB flash drive.

iPod and USB flash drive

Check that compatible files are stored on the device.

Unsupported*1, *2

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported

device is connected, reconnect the device.

*1:Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

*2:Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

Features

 

Continued 343

Audio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
Features

 

Error Message

Solution

Device No Response*1, *2

Appears when the system does not communicate with a connected device. If it appears

when a device is connected, contact your place of device purchase.

USB hub not supported*1, *2

Appears when only a HUB is connected. If it appears, connect a USB flash drive to the

HUB.

A charging error has occurred with the

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn

connected USB device. When safe please

the audio system off and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the

check the compatibility of the device and

error.

USB cable and try again.*1, *2

*1:Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

*2:Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

344

General Information on the Audio System

SiriusXM® Radio Service*

 

Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID on the screen, select Channel 0.
Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM® website to subscribe.
Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the audio remote controls on the steering wheel, or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.

SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
Channel **** is not subscribed. Call SiriusXM to subscribe.*1 You are not subscribed to the channel selected. Subscription Updated:

SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network.

Channel Not Available:

No such channel exists, or the artist or title information is unavailable.

No Signal:

The signal is too weak in the current location.

Check Tuner:

There is a problem with the SiriusXM® tuner. Contact a dealer.

Antenna Disconnected, Antenna Shorted:

There is a problem with the SiriusXM® antenna. Contact a dealer.

1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio

 

Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:

U.S.: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com/ subscribenow, or 1-866-635-2349
Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.siriusxm.ca/ subscribe-now, or 1-877-209-0079
1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio

The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.

You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances:

In a location with an obstruction to the south of your vehicle.
In tunnels
On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
Large items carried on the roof rack
Features

 

*1: ****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon the channel selected.

* Not available on all models 345

General Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Features

 

Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Model

Made for iPod touch (6th to 7th generation) released between 2015 and 2019 Made for iPhone 5s/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6S/iPhone 6S Plus/iPhone SE/ iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 8/iPhone 8 Plus/iPhone X/iPhone XS/iPhone XS Max/ iPhone XR/iPhone 11/iPhone 11 Pro/iPhone 11 Pro Max /iPhone SE (2nd generation)

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

 

Model

Made for iPod touch (5th to 6th generation) released between 2012 and 2015

Made for iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5s/iPhone 5c/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6S/ iPhone 6S Plus/iPhone SE/iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 8/iPhone 8 Plus/iPhone X/ iPhone XS/iPhone XS Max/iPhone XR/iPhone 11/iPhone 11 Pro/iPhone 11 Pro Max

USB Flash Drives
A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended.
Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or WAV formats may be unsupported.
*1: Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

*2: Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility

 

This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.

The Lightning connector works with iPhone 5*1, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c*1, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6S, iPhone 6S Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 7, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 8, iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone X, iPhone XS, iPhone XS Max, iPhone XR, iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone 11 Pro Max, iPhone SE (2nd generation)*2, iPod touch (5th*1, 6th, 7th*2 generation).

The 30-pin connector works with iPhone 4s*1.

USB works with iPhone 4s*1, iPhone 5*1, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c*1, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6S, iPhone 6S Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 7, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 8, iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone X, iPhone XS, iPhone XS Max, iPhone XR, iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone 11 Pro Max, iPhone SE (2nd generation)*2, iPod touch (5th*1, 6th, 7th*2 generation).

1USB Flash Drives

Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.

346

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Honda App License Agreement

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919 TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.

A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a “DEALER”). The SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.

B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property.

SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a) as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.
HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the “HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while you are using the SOFTWARE.
Features

 

Continued 347

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source licenses which govern HONDA’s distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone. Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual or within the SOFTWARE.
Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants, conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information, targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.
License Limitations and Restrictions on Use.
Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA (any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.
348

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:
copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation, HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION;
access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or interfere with anyone else’s use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES;
access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any way;
use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights;
use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver distraction laws, rules or regulations;
violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions, and privacy policies; or
reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software licenses.
Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors, affiliates, or suppliers.
Features

 

Continued 349

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other governments.
C. SOFTWARE Operation

HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.
Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver’s license issued by their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.
Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES.
Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of such websites and content.
350

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.
SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-the-air, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.
Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.
D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings

Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location (longitude and latitude), travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts, or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.
Features

 

Continued 351

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls, routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a) consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could result in a crash.
352

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
E. Information Collection and Storage

Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you. HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.
Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.
Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE (“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows, battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes, diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period of time necessary to fulfill these goals.
VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data (latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.
You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security and safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility.
Features

 

Continued 353

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, non-infringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may not apply to you.

G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights.

Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
354

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential, indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you, and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES interruptions of any length.
(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA, PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence, strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.

Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.
Features

 

Continued 355

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.

J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.

K. Termination and Transfer.

Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason, and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
356

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification, suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.

ARBITRATION:
PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION.

Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration. YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any representations, omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction.

YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers, HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.

Features

 

Continued 357

General Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features

 

Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA.

This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.

N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.

358

General Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS

USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING APPLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.

USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.

Features

 

Continued 359

General Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Features

 

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC., SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.

TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

360

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses

About Open Source Licenses

 

To see the open source license information, follow these steps.

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Press the MENU button.
Select License.
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

 

Press the button.
Select General Settings.
Select System.
Select About.
Select Legal Information.
Select License.
1About Open Source Licenses

 

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

LICENSE: Copyright © 2001 Bob Trower, Trantor Standard Systems Inc.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Features

 

361

General Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
License Information

Bluetooth

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PANASONIC CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

https://www.bluetooth.com/develop-with-bluetooth/marketing-branding/

 

Features

 

Windows Media
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.

362

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information

Apple
“Made for iPod,” and “Made for iPhone,” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone, may affect wireless performance.

Apple, the Apple Logo, iPhone, iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Apple CarPlay, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

 

Features

 

Continued 363

General Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
Features

 

MPEG
Mpeg4 Visual

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR

ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUALA STANDARD (“MPEG-4 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

VC-1

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD (“VC-1 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

364

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information

AVC/H.264

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE

PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN

COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE

AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL

AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO

PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL

BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE

HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

 

Features

365

Customized Features

Features

 

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

How to Customize the Settings
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press the MENU button. To customize the phone settings, press the PHONE button, then select Settings.

 

Audio/Information Screen

MENU Button

Selector Knob

PHONE Button

1Customized Features

 

When you customize settings:

Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Continuously variable transmission models

Shift to (P.
Manual transmission models

Set the parking brake.
To customize features detail, refer to the following.

Customization Flow P. 367
List of customizable options P. 370
366

Customization Flow
Press the MENU button.

 

Sound Settings

Bass / Treble

 

Balance / Fader

 

Speed Volume Compensation

 

Bluetooth Settings

Connect New Device

Change Device

Priority Device

Disconnect All Device

Delete Device

Clock Settings

Automatic Time

Daylight Saving Time

Set Time

Time Zone

Smartphone Settings

Apple CarPlay

Android Auto

 

Customized Featuresu

Features

Continued 367

Customized Featuresu

Features

 

RDS Settings

RDS Information

Display Adjustment

Brightness

Contrast

Black Level

Day

Night

Display OFF

Touch Panel Sensitivity

Rear Camera Setting

Fixed Guideline

Dynamic Guideline

Language

License

Factory Data Reset

 

368

Press the PHONE button and select Settings.

 

Bluetooth Settings

 

Connect New Device

 

Change Device

 

Priority Device

 

Disconnect All Device

 

Delete Device

 

Customized Featuresu

Ringtone

Phone

Vehicle

 

Auto Phone Call Transfer

 

Hands-Free System Clear

 

Features

Continued 369

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

List of customizable options Press the MENU button.
Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Bass / Treble

Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’

Sound Settings

Balance / Fader

sound.

Speed Volume

2 Adjusting the Sound P. 249

Compensation

Connect New Device

Pairs a new phone to HFL.

2 Phone Setup P. 406

Change Device

Connects a paired phone.

Bluetooth Settings

2 Phone Setup P. 406

Priority Device

Sets a device as the priority device.

ON*1/OFF

Disconnect All Device

Disconnects a paired phone from HFL.

Delete Device

Deletes a paired phone.

Selects ON to have the GPS automatically

Automatic Time

adjust the clock. Select OFF to cancel this

ON*1/OFF

function.

Clock Settings

Daylight Saving Time

Sets the clock to update based on daylight

ON/OFF*1

savings time.

Set Time

Adjusts time.

2 Adjusting the Clock P. 158

Time Zone

Changes the time zone manually.

Smartphone Settings

Apple CarPlay

Sets up the Apple CarPlay connection.

Android Auto

Sets up the Android Auto connection.

RDS Settings

RDS Information

Selects whether the RDS information comes

ON*1/OFF

on.

*1:Default Setting

370

Customized Featuresu
Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/

information screen.

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/

information screen.

Display Adjustment

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/

information screen.

Day

Changes between the daytime mode,

Night

nighttime mode and display off mode.

Display OFF

Touch Panel Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen.

Normal*1/High

Fixed Guideline

Shows the guideline that does not move with

ON*1/OFF

the steering wheel.

Rear Camera Setting

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 624

Dynamic Guideline

Shows the guideline that moves with the

ON*1/OFF

steering wheel.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 624

Language

Changes the display language.

English*1/Español/Français

License

Shows the legal information.

Factory Data Reset

Resets all the settings to their factory default.

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 373

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

Continued 371

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Press the PHONE button and select Settings.

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Connect New Device

Pairs a new phone to HFL.

2 Phone Setup P. 406

Change Device

Connects a paired phone.

2 Phone Setup P. 406

Bluetooth Settings

Priority Device

Sets a device as the priority device.

ON*1/OFF

Disconnect All Device

Disconnects a paired phone from HFL.

Delete Device

Deletes a paired phone.

Ringtone

Selects the ring tone.

Phone*1/Vehicle

Auto Phone Call Transfer

Sets calls to automatically transfer from your

ON*1/OFF

phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

Hands-Free System Clear

Resets all customized items in the Phone

Settings group as default.

*1:Default Setting

372

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Defaulting All the Settings

 

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

Press the MENU button.
Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen.

Select Yes to reset the settings.
Select Yes again to reset the settings. u The system will reboot.
1Defaulting All the Settings

 

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default.

 

Features

373

Customized Features

Features

 

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

 

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

How to Customize the General Settings
With the power mode in ON, press the button, and then select General Settings and select a setting item.

 

Audio/Information Screen

1Customized Features

 

When you customize settings:

Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Continuously variable transmission models

Shift to (P.
Manual transmission models

Set the parking brake.
To customize features detail, refer to the following.

Customization flow P. 375
System P. 379
Smartphone Connection P. 382
Connections P. 383
Display P. 384
Sound P. 384
Camera P. 385
Voice Control P. 385
374

Customized Featuresu
Customization flow
Press the button.

 

Select General Settings.

System

Date & Time

Language

 

Touch Panel Sensitivity

 

System Volumes

 

Set Date & Time

 

Time Zone

Auto Daylight Saving Time

Date Format

Time Format

System Sounds

 

Text-to-Speech

Navigation Guidance

Phone Calls

Default

Automatic

Date & Time

Set Date

Set Time

Automatic

Time Zone

(Select time

zone)

Features

 

Continued 375

Customized Featuresu

Features

 

Data Sharing Setting

Refuel Recommend

About

Factory Data Reset

Detail Information

 

Status

 

Legal Information

Model Number

Android Version

Kernel Version

Build Number

App Manager

 

376

Customized Featuresu

Smartphone

 

Connection

 

Connections

Display

 

Apple CarPlay

Android Auto

Wi-Fi

Bluetooth

 

Brightness

 

Contrast

Black Level

Default

Connect New Device (Saved Devices)
Connect New Device (Saved Devices)

Change Mode

 

(Available Networks/

Connected Devices)

Options

Add Network

Saved

Networks

Options

Bluetooth

Priority Device

 

Connect New Device (Saved Devices)

Features

 

Continued 377

Customized Featuresu

Features

 

Sound

Camera

Voice Control

Bass / Treble

Audio Zones & Balance /

Fader

Bose Centerpoint

Bose Dynamic Speed

Compensation

Rear Camera

Cross Traffic Monitor

Voice Control Mode

Treble

Midrange

Bass

Fixed Guideline

Dynamic Guideline

378

uuCustomized Featuresu

■ System

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Automatic

Selects ON to have the GPS automatically adjust the

ON*1/OFF

Date & Time

clock. Select OFF to cancel this function.

Set

Set Date

Adjusts date.

Day/Month/Year

Date &

2 Adjusting the Clock P. 158

Time

Set Time

Adjusts time.

Hour/Minute

2 Adjusting the Clock P. 158

AM/PM

Automatic

Sets the audio system to automatically adjust the clock

ON*1/OFF

Time

Time Zone

when driving through different time zones.

Date & Time

Zone

(Select time

Changes the time zone manually.

zone)

Auto Daylight Saving

Sets the clock to update based on daylight savings time.

ON*1/OFF

Time

MM/DD/YYYY*2/

Date Format

Select a date format.

DD/MM/YYYY*3/

YYYY/MM/DD

Time Format

Select a time format.

12H*1/24H

*1:Default Setting

*2:Default Setting for U.S. models

*3:Default Setting for Canadian models

Features

 

Continued 379

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Language

Changes the driver information interface and audio/

English*1/Español/

information screen language separately.

Français

Touch Panel

Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen.

High/Normal*1

Sensitivity

System Sounds

Sets the system sound volume level.

Text-to-Speech

Sets the text-to-speech volume level.

System Volumes

Navigation

Sets the navigation guidance volume level.

Guidance

Phone Calls

Sets the phone call volume level.

Default

Resets all System Volumes settings to default values.

Data Sharing

Turns the data sharing setting on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Setting

2 Start Up P. 274

Refuel Recommend

Turns the refuel recommend function on and off.

ON*1/OFF

2 Refuel Recommend P. 440

*1:Default Setting

380

Customized Featuresu
Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Status

Legal Information

About

Model Number

Displays the Android setting items.

Android Version

Kernel Version

Build Number

 

Factory Data

Resets all the settings to their factory default.

Reset

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 397

Detail

App Manager

Displays the Android system memory and apps

Information

information.

Continue/Cancel

Features

Continued 381

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

■ Smartphone Connection

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

+ Connect New Device

Pairs a new phone to Apple CarPlay.

2

Phone Setup P. 426

Apple CarPlay

(Saved Devices)

Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone.

2

Phone Setup P. 426

+ Connect New Device

Pairs a new phone to Android Auto.

2

Phone Setup P. 426

Android Auto

(Saved Devices)

Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone.

2

Phone Setup P. 426

382

uuCustomized Featuresu

Connections
Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Change Mode

Changes the Wi-Fi mode.

Network*1/

Smartphone*2/OFF

(Available Networks/Connected

Displays the available network(s) or current connected

Devices)

device(s).

Options

Add Network

Adds a new network to connect Wi-Fi.

Wi-Fi

Saved Networks

Saves the connected network.

Network SSID

Sets the network name.

Security

Displays the network security.

Setup

Password

Sets password for require entering password when

connecting Wi-Fi device to the network.

Wi-Fi Band

Displays the Wi-Fi band.

Options

Bluetooth

Turns the Bluetooth® on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Priority Device

Displays the priority device.

Bluetooth

+ Connect New Device

Pairs a new phone to HFL.

2 Phone Setup P. 426

(Saved Devices)

Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone.

2 Phone Setup P. 426

*1:Default Setting

*2:Appears only when Apple CarPlay or Android Auto is connected wirelessly.

Features

 

Continued 383

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

■ Display

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/information screen.

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/information screen.

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/information screen.

Default

Resets all customized settings for the brightness,

contrast, and black level.

■ Sound

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Treble

Bass / Treble

Midrange

Bass

Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers’ sound.

Audio Zones & Balance / Fader

2 Adjusting the Sound P. 291

Bose Centerpoint

Bose Dynamic Speed Compensation

384

uuCustomized Featuresu

■ Camera

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Fixed Guideline

Shows the guideline that does not move with the

ON*1/OFF

steering wheel.

Rear Camera

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 624

Dynamic Guideline

Shows the guideline that moves with the steering

ON*1/OFF

wheel.

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 624

Cross Traffic Monitor

Shows arrows on the rear camera image to indicate

ON*1/OFF

vehicles approaching from the sides.

2 Cross Traffic Monitor* P. 620

*1:Default Setting

■ Voice Control

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Voice Control Mode

Selects a mode of the voice portal screen.

Assist/Normal*1

2 Voice Control Operation P. 294

*1:Default Setting

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 385

Customized Featuresu
How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
With the power mode in ON, press the button, and then select Vehicle Settings and select a setting item.

 

Features

Audio/Information Screen

386

uuCustomized Featuresu

Customization flow
Press the button.

 

Select Vehicle Settings.

 

TPMS Calibration*

Driver Assist System Setup

 

Forward Collision Warning Distance

 

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep

 

Road Departure Mitigation Setting

 

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

 

Blind Spot Info

 

Traffic Sign Recognition System Display Setting Traffic Sign Recognition System Speed Limit Warning Speed Limit Warning Threshold Setting Driver Attention Monitor

 

Features

* Not available on all models Continued 387

Customized Featuresu

Features

 

Meter Setup

Keyless Access Setup

 

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

 

“Trip A” Reset Timing

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Adjust Alarm Volume

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turn By Turn Auto Display

Speed/Distance Units

Rear Seat Reminder

Door Unlock Mode

 

Smart Entry Light Flash

Smart Entry Beep

Remote Start System ON/OFF

Lockout Protection

388

 

Lighting Setup

Door/Window Setup

Maintenance Info.

Auto High Beam

 

Interior Light Dimming Time

Headlight Auto OFF Timer

Auto Light Sensitivity*

Auto Headlight On with Wiper On

Auto Door Lock

 

Auto Door Unlock

Key And Remote Unlock Mode

Walk Away Auto Lock

Keyless Lock Answer Back

Remote Window Control

Select Reset Items

 

Customized Featuresu

Features

* Not available on all models Continued 389

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

■ TPMS Calibration*

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

TPMS Calibration

Cancels/Calibrates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).

Calibrate/Cancel

2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)* P. 484

■ Driver Assist System Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Forward Collision Warning

Selects distance for Forward Collision Warning audible and visual

Long/Normal*1/Short

alerts.

Distance

2

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 499

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect

Turns On/Off audible notification when vehicle has moved in/out of

adaptive cruise control with Low Speed Follow

*

range.

ON/OFF*1

Beep

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow* P. 522

2

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* P. 543

Road Departure Mitigation

Selects operating mode of the Road Departure Mitigation system.

Narrow/Normal*1/Wide/

Setting

2

Road Departure Mitigation System P. 584

Warning Only

Lane Keeping Assist

Selects On/Off the LKAS alert for not detecting road lines.

ON/OFF*1

Suspend Beep

2

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 563

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models
Customized Featuresu
Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Blind Spot Info

Selects On/Off the blind spot information system audible alert.

Audible And Visual Alert*1/

2 Blind Spot Information System* P. 491

Visual Alert

Traffic Sign Recognition

Displays the traffic sign recognition system on the instrument panel.

Display*1/None

System Display Setting

2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 592

Traffic Sign Recognition

Enables over speed limit warning when speed limit is exceeded.

System Speed Limit

ON*1/OFF

2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 592

Warning

Speed Limit*1/Speed Limit

+3mph/Speed Limit

+5mph/Speed Limit

Changes the setting speed the traffic sign recognition system over

+10mph

Speed Limit Warning

(When mph is selected)

speed warning is activated.

Threshold Setting

Speed Limit*1/Speed Limit

2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 592

+5km/h/Speed Limit

+10km/h/Speed Limit

+15km/h

(When km/h is selected)

OFF/Tactile Alert/Tactile

Driver Attention Monitor

Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.

2 Driver Attention Monitor P. 148

And Audible Alert*1

*1:Default Setting

 

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 391

Customized Featuresu
■ Meter Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Adjust Outside Temp.

Selects to adjust outside temperature reading by a few degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F (U.S.)

Display

2 Outside Temperature P. 114

-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C (Canada)

Features

 

“Trip A” Reset Timing

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Adjust Alarm Volume

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turn By Turn Auto Display

Selects the timing to reset Trip A.

Range / Fuel / Trip Meter P. 144
Speed & Time P. 146
Selects the timing to reset Trip B.

Range / Fuel / Trip Meter P. 144
Speed & Time P. 146
Changes volume level of all system warnings, door opening warning and indicator.

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

Turns on/off the pop-up warning in the turn-by-turn navigation in the driver information interface.

Turn-by-Turn Directions P. 147
When Fully Refueled/IGN OFF/ Manually Reset*1

When Fully Refueled/IGN OFF/ Manually Reset*1

High/Mid*1/Low

ON*1/OFF

ON*1/OFF

km/h · km/mph · miles*1

Speed/Distance Units

Selects the trip computer units.

(U.S.)

2 Speed/Distance Units P. 154

km/h · km*1/mph · miles

(Canada)

Rear Seat Reminder

Turns the Rear Seat Reminder feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

*1:Default Setting

392

uuCustomized Featuresu

■ Keyless Access Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Door Unlock Mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver’s door

Driver Door Only*1/All

handle.

Doors

Smart Entry Light Flash

Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/lock the

ON*1/OFF

doors.

Smart Entry Beep

Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors.

ON*1/OFF

Remote Start System ON/

Turns the remote engine start feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

OFF*

Lockout Protection

Changes the settings for the lockout protection function.

ON*1/OFF

*1:Default Setting

 

Features

 

* Not available on all models Continued 393

Customized Featuresu
Features

 

■ Lighting Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Auto High Beam

Turns on/off auto high beam function.

ON*1/OFF

Interior Light Dimming Time

Selects the length of time the interior lights stay on after doors are

60sec/30sec*1/15sec

closed.

Interior Lights P. 215
Headlight Auto OFF Timer

Selects the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close

60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec

the driver’s door.

Automatic Lighting Off Feature P. 192
Auto Light Sensitivity*

Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.

Min/Low/Mid*1/High/Max

Auto Headlight On with

Selects On/Off headlight function and wiper operation when the

ON*1/OFF

headlight is in AUTO setting.

Wiper On

2 Headlight Integration with Wipers P. 192

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu

Door/Window Setup
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

 

Continuously variable transmission models

OFF/With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift From P

Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for the automatic locking feature.

Manual transmission models

Changes the setting for when the doors unlock

Auto Door Unlock

automatically.

OFF/With Vehicle Speed*1

Continuously variable transmission models

 

OFF/All Doors When Driver’s Door Opens*1/All Doors When Shifted to Park/All Doors With IGN OFF

 

Manual transmission models

 

OFF/All Doors When Driver’s Door

Opens*1/All Doors With IGN OFF

Key And Remote Unlock

Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock on

Driver Door Only*1/All Doors

Mode

the first push of the remote key or built-in key.

Walk Away Auto Lock

Changes the settings for the auto lock function when

ON/OFF*1

you walk away from the vehicle.

Keyless Lock Answer Back

Turns on/off flash of exterior lights when doors are

ON*1/OFF

locked/unlocked by remote key.

2 Using the Remote Transmitter P. 168

Remote Window Control

Turns the remote window control on and off.

ON*1/OFF

*1:Default Setting

Features

Continued 395

uuCustomized Featuresu

■ Maintenance Info.

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Maintenance Info.

Resets the maintenance information.

Select Reset Items

2

Maintenance MinderTM P. 635

 

Features

396

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Defaulting All the Settings

 

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

Defaulting General Settings
Press the button.
Select General Settings.
Select System.
Select Factory Data Reset.

u A confirmation message appears on the screen.

Select Continue to reset the settings.
Select Continue again to reset the settings. u The system will reboot.
Defaulting Vehicle Settings
Press the button.
Select Vehicle Settings.
Select Default.
Select Yes.

1Defaulting All the Settings

 

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use the HondaLink® because it becomes off line.

HondaLink® P. 321
Features

 

397

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.

Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer.

Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.

 

1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *

 

Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.

NOTE:

Some LED lightbulbs installed in the garage door opener can interfere with the training and consistent operation of your HomeLink device. Please consider use of Low RF interference bulbs in your garage door opener.

Features

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s path.

* Not available on all models
uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink

Training HomeLink

 

HomeLink Button
Indicator

 

HomeLink Button
If it is necessary to erase a previously entered

learned code:

Press and hold the I and III HomeLink buttons for about 10 seconds, until the green indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1.
If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1.

The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener, visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800) 355-3515.

Features

Continued 399

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink
Programming a Button
Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 – 8 cm) from the HomeLink® button you want to program.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Is the HomeLink indicator (LED) slowly flashing orange?

1Training HomeLink

 

Reprogramming a Button

If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until

the HomeLink indicator begins to slowly flash

Features

 

YES

 

3a. Hold the button on the remote transmitter. Does HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green or continuously on green? The process should take less than 60 seconds.

 

Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a second. Does the device (garage door opener) work?

NO

 

3b. Canadian Garage Door Opener

 

A. Press and release the HomeLink button. Press, hold and release the button on the remote every 2 secs. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED)

change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing or continuously on

green? The process should take less than 60 seconds.

orange. This should take about 20 seconds.

2. Release the HomeLink button and position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 – 3 inches (3 – 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program, then follow steps 3 – 6 under “programming a button.”

Erasing Button Memory

To erase programming from the buttons, press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons until the HomeLink indicator changes from orange to rapidly flashing green. This should take about 10 seconds. You should erase all

YES NO

 

Press and hold the HomeLink button again.

programming before selling the vehicle.

Operating

Training

 

Complete HomeLink LED is continuously on green.

 

Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
The remote-controlled device should operate.

Training Complete

 

HomeLink indicator rapidly flashes green.

 

5a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the “learn” button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener).

 

5b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.

 

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device.

Questions

For questions or comments, visit www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the HomeLink Hotline (North America only) at (800) 355-3515.

HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

400

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

HFL Buttons

VOL (+/VOL (-

(Volume) Switch

Selector Knob

Left Selector Wheel

PHONE Button

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

 

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:

U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.
Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
Voice control tips

Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

Up to 20 favorite contacts can be stored. If there is no entry in the system, the pop-up notification appears on the screen.

Favorite Contacts P. 414
Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled.

Features

 

Continued 401

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
Left Selector Wheel: While receiving a call, the incoming call screen is displayed on the driver information interface. You can pick up the call using the left selector wheel.

Receiving a Call P. 419
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.

Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .

 

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

 

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

Features

402

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
HFL Status Display
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

 

1HFL Status Display

 

The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

HFL Mode

Battery Level Status

Signal Strength

Roam Status

Call Name

Call Number

 

Features

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

403

 

Features

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
HFL Menus

 

The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.

1HFL Menus

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-

compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle

is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving. A message

appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving

PHONE button

and the operation is canceled.

Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.

Recent Calls*1

All

Display the last outgoing calls.

Dialed

Display the last missed calls.

Missed

Display the last incoming calls.

Received

Favorite

Dial the selected number in the favorite contacts list.

Contacts*1

(Existing entry list)

Display the phonebook of the paired phone.

Contacts*1

Enter a phone number to dial.

Keypad*1

Pair a phone to the system.

Settings

Bluetooth Settings

Connect New Device

Connects a paired phone.

Change Device

Sets a device as the priority device.

Priority Device

 

Disconnect All Device Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

 

*1: Available only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Delete Device

Delete a previously paired phone.

 

404

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Ringtone

Phone

 

Vehicle

 

Select the ring tone stored in the connected cell phone.

Select the ring tone stored in HFL.

Auto Phone Call Transfer

Hands-Free

System Clear

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

Clear the phone settings, paired phones, all favorite contacts entries, all call history data, and all imported phonebook data.

 

Features

Continued 405

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Phone Setup
To pair a cell phone (No phone has

been paired to the system)

Press the PHONE button.
Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode.
Select Yes.
u The audio system will enter a waiting mode for pairing.

Select Honda Civic from your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this
audio system, select Search from car and follow the prompts.

When your phone appears on the list, select it.

The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful.
1Phone Setup

 

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is connected to HFL.
If your phone is not ready to be paired or is not paired within three minutes, the system will time out and return to the Bluetooth Settings screen.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side.

These icons indicate the following:

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

: The phone can be used with HFL.

When pairing a phone from this audio system: If your phone doesn’t appear on the audio/ information screen, select Search from phone and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select Honda Civic.

406

To pair a cell phone (when a phone has

already been paired to the system)

Press the PHONE button.
u If a prompt appears asking to connect to

a phone, select No and proceed with step 2.

Select Settings.
Select Bluetooth Settings.
Select Connect New Device.
u The audio system will enter a waiting mode for pairing.

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Continued 407

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode.
Select Honda Civic from your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this
audio system, select Search from car and follow the prompts.

When your phone appears on the list, select it.

The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful.
u You can prioritize a Bluetooth® device at the same time. Select Yes if you want to prioritize the device.

 

408

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To change the currently paired phone
1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Select Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth Settings.

 

4. Select Change Device.

 

u The screen changes to a device list.

Features

Select a desired device name.
Select Both, Audio, or Phone.
u When another device is connected to

Android Auto and you select Both or

Phone, a confirmation message appears.

Select Continue.

u HFL disconnects the connected phone

and starts searching for another paired

phone.

Continued 409

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To delete a paired phone
1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Select Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth Settings.

 

Select Delete Device.
u The screen changes to a device list.

Select a phone you want to delete.
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
u When the device is connected to Android Auto, a confirmation message appears. Select Yes.

410

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Automatic Transferring
If paring between your phone and the system is executed while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.

Press the PHONE button.
Select Settings.
Select Auto Phone Call Transfer.
Select ON or OFF.

Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting.

Press the PHONE button.
Select Settings.
Select Ringtone.
Select Phone or Vehicle.

1Ring Tone

 

Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected.

Vehicle: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.

Features

 

Continued 411

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To Clear the System
Phone settings, paired phones, all favorite contacts entries, all call history data, and all imported phonebook data are erased.

Press the PHONE button.
Select Settings.
Select Hands-Free System Clear.
Select Yes.

A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
A notification appears on the screen. Select OK.
412

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.

 

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

 

When you select a person from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to five category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Voice

Work

Other

Pager

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Features

 

Continued 413

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Favorite Contacts
■ To add a favorite contacts

Recent Calls Screen

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Select Recent Calls, Contacts, or Keypad.

 

On the Recent Calls or Contacts screen

 

Select the star icon.
Star Icon

Contacts Screen

Star Icon

Keypad Screen

On the Keypad screen

3. Select Add to Favorites.

u A notification appears on the screen if

the favorite contact is successfully stored.

u To remove the favorite contact, select

the star icon again.

Add to Favorites

414

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To delete a favorite contact
1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Select Favorite Contacts.

3. Select the star icon.

4. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.

 

Star Icon

 

Features

Continued 415

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported Recent Calls, Favorite Contacts, and Contacts entries.

 

To make a call using the imported phonebook

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically imported to HFL.

Press the PHONE button.
Select Contacts.
The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Select a name.

Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1Making a Call

 

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

416

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To make a call using a phone number
Press the PHONE button.
Select Keypad.
Select a number.
Select Call.

u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received.
Press the PHONE button.
Select Recent Calls.

u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.

Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the call history

 

The call history appears only when a phone is connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls.

Features

 

Continued 417

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To make a call using a favorite contact
Press the PHONE button.
Select Favorite Contacts.
Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

 

Features

418

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Receiving a Call
HFL Mode

 

Caller’s Name

When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds and the Incoming Call… screen appears.

You can answer the call using the left selector wheel.

To pick the call, roll up or down to select Answer on the driver information interface and then press the left selector wheel.

u If you want to decline or end the call, select Ignore on the driver information interface using the left selector wheel.

1Receiving a Call

 

Call Waiting

Select Answer using the left selector wheel to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Select Swap calls using the left selector wheel to return to the current call.

Select Ignore using the left selector wheel to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Select Hang Up using the left selector wheel if you want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the icons on the driver information interface.

Features

 

Continued 419

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.

Swap Calls: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Use Handheld: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.

Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.

Mute Icon

The available options are shown on the lower

half of the screen.

 

Select the option.

u The mute icon appears when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

1Options During a Call

 

Keypad: Available on some phones.

420

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

 

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

HFL Buttons

VOL(+/VOL(-(Volume) Switch

Left Selector

Wheel

(Talk) Button

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

 

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:

U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876.
Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
To use the system, the Bluetooth setting must be ON. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay, HFL is unavailable.

Customized Features P. 374
Voice control tips

Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
Press the button when you want to call a number using a phonebook name or a number. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.
To change the volume level, the volume level is able to change by the audio system’s volume.
If there is no Favorite Contact entry in the system, the pop-up notification appears on the screen.

Favorite Contacts P. 432
Features

 

Continued 421

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
(Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal.

Left Selector Wheel: Roll up or down to select Phone on the driver information interface, and then press the left selector wheel.

While receiving a call, the incoming call screen is displayed on the driver information interface. You can pick up the call using the left selector wheel.

Receiving a Call P. 436
To go to the phone screen:

Press the button.
Select Phone to switch the display to the phone screen.

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

 

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

Features

422

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
HFL Status Display
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

Signal Strength

Bluetooth Indicator

Battery Level Status

Appears when your

phone is connected to

HFL Mode

HFL.

Caller’s Name (If

registered)/Caller’s

Number (If not

registered)

 

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.

Favorite Contacts P. 432
1HFL Status Display

 

The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

Features

 

423

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
HFL Menus

 

The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.

Phone settings screen
1. Press the button.

 

2. Select Phone.

3. Select Settings.

 

1HFL Menus

 

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving.

Features

Change Devices

 

Auto Sync Phone

 

Auto Phone Call Transfer

 

Ringtone

 

HondaLink Assist

 

Pair a new phone to the system.

+ Connect New Device

(Existing entry list)

Connect, disconnect, or delete a paired device.

 

Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

Select a fixed ring tone or the one from the connected cell phone.

Turn HondaLink® Assist on and off.

424

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Phone menu screen

Recent Calls

Press the button.
Select Phone.
All

Dialed

Missed

Received

Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.

Display the last outgoing calls.

Display the last missed calls.

Display the last incoming calls.

Features

 

Favorite Contacts

Contacts

Keypad

(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the favorite contacts list.

Display the phonebook of the paired phone.

Enter a phone number to dial.

Continued 425

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Phone Setup
Bluetooth® setup
You can turn Bluetooth® function on and off.

Press the button.
Select General Settings.
Select Connections.
Select Bluetooth.
Select Options.
Select Bluetooth, then select ON.

To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)
Select Phone.
Select Connect New Device.
Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode.
Select Honda CIVIC from your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this audio system, select Search for
Devices, and then select your phone when it appears on the list.

The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone.

Select desired functions and then select Connect.

1Phone Setup

 

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to the system before you can make and receive hands-free calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving.
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is paired to the system.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or more icons on the right side.

These icons indicate the following:

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

: The phone can be used with HFL.

: The phone is compatible with Apple CarPlay.

: The phone is compatible with Android Auto.

If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, pairing of additional Bluetooth-compatible devices is unavailable.

426

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful.
Select OK.
u A confirmation message for phone data collection appears.

Select ON or OFF.
u A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.

Select Yes or No.

Features

Continued 427

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

To change the currently paired phone
Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 424

Select Change Devices.
Select a phone to connect.
u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone.

u You can set the connected phone priority. Select the box checked on the phone you want to prioritize.

Select , , or .

u and can be selected

simultaneously, however, when or

is selected, and cannot be

 

selected.

Select Apply.
1To change the currently paired phone

 

If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is connected again.

To pair other phones, select + Connect New Device from the Bluetooth screen.

428

To delete a paired phone

Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 424

Select Change Devices.
Select a phone you want to delete.
Select Options.
Select Delete Device.
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Delete.
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Continued 429

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting.

Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 424

Select Ringtone.
Select Vehicle or Phone.

Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.

Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 424

Select Auto Phone Call Transfer.
Select ON or OFF.

1Ring Tone

 

Vehicle: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.

Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected.

430

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When Automatic Phone Sync is set to

On:

When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to the system.

Changing the Automatic Phone Sync

setting

Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 424

Select Auto Sync Phone.
Select ON or OFF.
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

 

When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see a category icon. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Voice

Work

Other

Pager

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Features

 

Continued 431

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Favorite Contacts
■ To add a favorite contacts

Recent Calls Screen

1. Select Phone.

2. Select Recent Calls, Contacts, or Keypad.

On the Recent Calls or Contacts screen

3. Select the star icon.

Star Icon

Contacts Screen

 

Star Icon

Keypad Screen

On the Keypad screen

3. Select Add to Favorite Contacts.

u A notification appears on the screen if

the favorite contact is successfully stored.

u To remove the favorite contact, select

the star icon again.

Add to Favorite Contacts

432

To edit a favorite contacts
Select Phone.
Select Favorite Contacts.
Select Edit on the favorite contacts entry you want to edit.
Select a setting you want.
Select Done.
To delete a favorite contacts

Select Phone.
Select Favorite Contacts.
Select Edit on the favorite contacts entry you want to delete.
Select Remove.
A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Continued 433

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported Recent

 

Calls, Favorite Contacts, and Contacts entries.

To make a call using the imported phonebook

1. Select Phone.

2. Select Contacts.

Select a name.
u You can sort by First Name or Last Name. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.

Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1Making a Call

 

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

While there is an active connection with Apple CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with HandsFreeLink® and are only made from Apple CarPlay.

434

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To make a call using a phone number
Select Phone.
Select Keypad.
Select a number.

u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering numbers.

Select Call.
u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using the Call History Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, and Received.
Select Phone.
Select Recent Calls.

u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.

Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

To make a call using a favorite contacts entry

Select Phone.
Select Favorite Contacts.
u You can change the order of favorite contacts entries by selecting Reorder.

Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the Call History

 

The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed, missed, or received calls.

(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.)

Features

 

Continued 435

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features

 

Receiving a Call
When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming Call… screen appears.

 

You can answer the call using the left selector wheel.

To pick the call, roll up or down to select (answer) on the driver information interface and then press the left selector wheel.

 

u If you want to decline or end the call,

select (ignore) on the driver

 

information interface using the left

selector wheel.

1Receiving a Call

 

Call Waiting

Select (answer) to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Select using the left selector wheel to return to the current call.

Select (ignore) to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.

Select if you want to hang up the current call.

You can select the icons on the audio/information

screen instead of the and on the driver information interface.

436

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Use Handheld: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.

Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.

The available options are shown on the lower half of the screen.

 

Select the option.

u The mute icon appears when Mute is selected when the other source screen other than the phone screen is displayed. Select Mute again to turn it off.

1Options During a Call

 

Keypad: Available on some phones.

You can select the icons on the audio/information screen.

Features

 

437

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHondaLink® Assist
Features

 

HondaLink® Assist

In Case of Emergency
Automatic collision notification

If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition can be sent to the operator*1; you also can speak to the operator when connected.

 

IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/ TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER Honda-PRO NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.

Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation.

1In Case of Emergency

 

Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage.

You cannot use this emergency service when:

You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage areas.
There is a problem with the connecting devices, such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your vehicle.

1Automatic collision notification

If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds.

*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle’s location may not be sent to the operator.

438

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHondaLink® Assist
To enable notification
1. Go to the phone settings screen.

 

2 Phone settings screen P. 424

2. Select HondaLink Assist.

3. Select Yes or No.

1To enable notification

 

Setting options:

Yes: Notification is available.
No: Disable the feature.

Features

439

Refuel Recommend

Features

 

Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

 

Your vehicle is equipped with a feature that automatically calculates when to refuel. This feature will notify you when refueling is recommended as well as enable you to search for gas stations that are located in the vicinity of your vehicle.

When it is time to refuel the vehicle, a notification is displayed and a notification icon is displayed in the header.
Touch the box that contains the icon.

Notification

icon

3. Select Find Gas Station Now.

Choose a gas station from the search screen of the navigation system.
u For instructions on how to use the navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual.

1Refuel Recommend

 

You can turn the Refuel Recommend function on and off.

Customized Features P. 374
When you turn off this feature, the refuel recommend notification will not display.

This feature can only be used when the gas tank fuel level is below 30 percent.

If you select Find Gas Station Now or put more than 5 liters of gasoline into the gas tank, the notification for refueling will disappear. If you prefer not to be notified, select OFF in the settings for Refuel Recommend.

When you drive on a rough road or ascend or descend a hill for an extended period of time, the notification may disappear or may not be displayed at all.

440

Driving

This chapter discusses driving and refueling.

Before Driving 442

Towing a Trailer 447

When Driving

Starting the Engine 448

Precautions While Driving 455

Continuously Variable Transmission* 456

Shifting 457, 459, 463

ECON Button* 466

Auto Idle Stop 467, 473

Drive Mode Switch* 478

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic

Stability Control (ESC), System 481

Agile Handling Assist 483

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)* . 484

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) –

Required Federal Explanation* 489

Blind Spot Information System* 491

Honda Sensing® 495

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM

(CMBSTM) 499

Low Speed Braking Control* 511, 517

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low

Speed Follow* 522

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* 543

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 563

Traffic Jam Assist* 575

Road Departure Mitigation System 584

Traffic Sign Recognition System 592

Front Wide View Camera 598

Sonar Sensors* 600

Braking

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 611

Brake Assist System 612

Parking Your Vehicle 613

Multi-View Rear Camera 624

Refueling 626

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions 629

Turbo Engine Vehicle* 630

* Not available on all models 441

Before Driving

Driving

 

Driving Preparation

 

Check the following items before you start driving.

Exterior Checks
Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.

u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.

u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel or wheel components.

Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.

Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 668

Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside.
1Exterior Checks

 

NOTICE

When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing.

Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole.

Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you’ve parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also, check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle.

442

Before DrivinguDriving Preparation
Interior Checks
Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.

Maximum Load Limit P. 445
Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking.

Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator pedal operation while driving.

If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
Securely close and lock all doors and the hatch.
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 172
Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the front head restraint, too.

Seats P. 206
Adjusting the Front Head Restraints Positions P. 212
Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.

Mirrors P. 204
Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 203
1Interior Checks

 

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

Driving

 

Continued 443

Before DrivinguDriving Preparation
Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats.
u They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.

Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
Fastening a Seat Belt P. 49
Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.

2 Indicators P. 90

 

Driving

444

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Maximum Load Limit

 

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb.

 

Label Example

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit –

Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 – 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
1Maximum Load Limit

 

WARNING
Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories and all cargo.

Specifications P. 726
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.

Specifications P. 726
Driving

 

Continued 445

Before DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Driving

 

Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

 

Load Limits Example

Example1

Max Load

Passenger Weight

Cargo Weight

850 lbs

150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs

550 lbs

(385 kg)

(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

(249 kg)

Example2

Max Load

Passenger Weight

Cargo Weight

850 lbs

150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs

100 lbs

(385 kg)

(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

(45 kg)

1Maximum Load Limit

 

Towing a Trailer:

See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your vehicle is designed to tow a trailer.

Towing a Trailer P. 447
446

Towing a Trailer

Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your warranties.

Towing Behind a Motorhome

 

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.

Emergency Towing P. 720

Driving

447

When Driving

Starting the Engine

 

Driving

 

Electric Parking Brake Switch

 

Brake Pedal

 

Clutch Pedal

Brake Pedal

Make sure the parking brake is applied. u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) comes on for 30 seconds when you pull up the electric parking brake switch.

Continuously variable transmission models

 

Check that the transmission is in P, then depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle in N, it is safer to start it in P.

Manual transmission models

 

Check that the shift lever is in N. Then depress the brake pedal with your right foot, and the clutch pedal with your left foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed to start the engine.

1Starting the Engine

 

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.

Bring the keyless remote close to the ENGINE START/STOP button if the battery in the keyless remote is weak.

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 699
The engine may not start if the keyless remote is subjected to strong radio waves.

Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to start the engine.

If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds before starting the engine again.

448

When DrivinguStarting the Engine
All models

 

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1Starting the Engine

 

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

Immobilizer System P. 179

Driving

Continued 449

When DrivinguStarting the Engine
Remote Engine Start*
You can remotely start the engine using the keyless remote.

1Remote Engine Start*

 

WARNING
To start the engine

LED: Blinks when any

button is pressed.

 

Press the

button, then press and hold

the

button.

 

u Some exterior lights flash once.

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can rapidly accumulate in closed or even partly enclosed areas.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Never use the remote engine starter with the vehicle parked in a garage or other areas with limited ventilation.

Driving

If the engine starts successfully, some exterior lights flash six times.

 

If the engine does not start, exterior lights will not flash.

 

u Go within the range, and try again.

The remote engine start may violate local laws. Before using the remote engine start, check your local laws.

If there are buildings and obstacles between your vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced. This distance may vary by external electrical interference.

* Not available on all models
When DrivinguStarting the Engine
When started remotely, the engine automatically shuts off after 10 minutes of idling and/or the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP button have not been pressed simultaneously.

To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the

 

button, then press and hold the button.

u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was transmitted successfully.

1Remote Engine Start*

 

The engine may not start by the remote engine start if:

You have disabled a remote engine start setting using the driver information interface* or audio/ information screen*.
2 Settings P. 129

2 Customized Features P. 374

The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF.
The transmission is in a position other than (P.
The hood is open, or any door or the hatch is unlocked.
You have already used the remote twice to start the engine.
Another registered keyless remote is in the vehicle.
There is any antenna failure.
The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
The engine oil pressure is low.
The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
The security system alarm is not set.
Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 451

When DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving

 

To stop the engine

Press and hold the button for one second.

If the engine starts successfully, the exterior lights flash once.

When the remote is out of the keyless access system range, the exterior lights will not flash. The engine will not stop.

u Go within the range, and try again.

1Remote Engine Start*

 

The engine may stop while it is running if:

You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of starting the engine with the keyless remote.
The engine is stopped by using the keyless remote.
The security system alarm is not set.
The door is unlocked with the built-in key.
The hood is open, or any door, or the hatch is unlocked.
You press the shift lever release button.
The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
The battery is low.
The engine oil pressure is low.
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control systems.
While the engine is running, the vehicle will automatically precondition inside the vehicle. When it is warm outside:

The climate control system is activated in
recirculation mode.

When it is cold outside:

The defroster is activated at a moderately warm temperature.
The rear defogger, heated door mirrors*, front seat heaters* and heated steering wheel* are activated.
2 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button P. 200

2 Front Seat Heaters* P. 231

2 Heated Steering Wheel* P. 230

* Not available on all models
When DrivinguStarting the Engine
Starting to Drive

Continuously variable transmission models

 

When the engine was started using the button on the keyless remote

Depress and hold the brake pedal, then press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
When the engine was started in any case

 

Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, put the transmission into D. Select R when reversing.
With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal.
u Make sure the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off.

2 Parking Brake P. 601

Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

Continuously variable transmission models

 

Put the transmission into D, S*, or L* when facing uphill, or R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

Manual transmission models

 

Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill, or R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

1Starting to Drive

 

Manual transmission models

Engine Restart Function

If the engine stalls, fully depress the clutch pedal within three seconds. The engine may automatically restart under certain conditions. Otherwise, follow the standard procedure.

Starting the Engine P. 448
When the engine was started using the button on the keyless remote

The engine stops when the transmission is taken out of (P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to drive.

You can also release the parking brake by pressing the electric parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal.

When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle more smoothly by manually releasing it with the electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with the accelerator pedal.

1Hill start assist system

Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.

Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is switched off.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 453

When DrivinguStarting the Engine
Stopping the Engine
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Continuously variable transmission models

 

Put the transmission into P.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Manual transmission models

 

If the transmission is in N, press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
If the transmission is in any gear other than N, depress the clutch pedal, then press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

1Stopping the Engine

 

The power mode will automatically turn to VEHICLE OFF about 20 minutes after the following conditions have been met:

A door has been opened, such as when leaving the vehicle.
The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
Continuously variable transmission models

The transmission is in (P. Manual transmission models
The vehicle is completely stopped.
Driving

454

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

Precautions While Driving

In Rain

Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.

Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

1Precautions While Driving

 

Continuously variable transmission models

NOTICE

Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.

NOTICE

If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored.

Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system.

If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.

Do not select (N while driving as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance.

During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as not to damage the engine or powertrain.

Driving

 

Continued 455

When DrivinguContinuously Variable Transmission*
Driving

 

Continuously Variable Transmission*

 

Creeping
When the engine runs at higher idle speeds, the creeping force increases.

Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower ratio, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

1Precautions While Driving

 

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km)

after purchasing your new vehicle or replacing the

brake pads or rotors, to allow for proper break-in.

NOTICE

The following can damage the under spoiler:

Parking the vehicle by a parking block
Parallel parking along the road shoulder
Driving towards the bottom of a hill
Driving up or down to a different surface level (such as a road shoulder)
Driving on a rutted or bumpy road
Driving on a road with potholes
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Continuously variable transmission models without paddle shifter

 

Shifting

 

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

Shift positions
Park

Used when parking or starting the

engine

Reverse

Used when reversing

Neutral

Transmission is not locked

Drive

Used for normal driving

Drive (S)

Used:

● For better acceleration

● To increase engine braking

Release Button

● When going up or down hills

Low

● Used to further increase engine braking

● Used when going up or down hills

 

Shifting
You cannot change the power mode from ON to VEHICLE OFF unless the shift position is in (P.

The vehicle may move very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold.

Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.

 

Driving

 

Continued 457

When DrivinguShifting
Driving

 

Shift Operation

Tachometer’s Red Zone

Shift Position Indicator

(Transmission System Indicator)

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.

Press the shift lever release button and shift.

1Shift Operation

 

NOTICE

When you change the shift position from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed.

Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.

If the transmission system indicator blinks when driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with the transmission.

Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the

brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release

button is held down.

Depress the brake pedal first.

When shifting positions in extremely low temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the shift position is displayed. Always confirm you are in the correct shift position before driving.

458

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Continuously variable transmission models with paddle shifter

 

Shifting

 

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

Shift positions

Park

Used when parking or starting the

engine

Reverse

Used when reversing

Neutral

Transmission is not locked

Drive

Used:

● For normal driving

● When temporarily driving in the 7-speed manual shift mode

● When driving in the 7-speed manual shift mode (when driving in SPORT mode)

Release Button

Shifting
You cannot change the power mode from ON to VEHICLE OFF unless the shift position is in (P.

The vehicle may move very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold.

Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.

 

Driving

 

Continued 459

When DrivinguShifting
Driving

 

Shift Operation

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

Tachometer’s Red Zone

Shift Position Indicator (Transmission System Indicator)

M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode)

Indicator/Shift Indicator

Press the shift lever release button and shift.

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.

1Shift Operation

 

NOTICE

When you change the shift position from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed.

Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.

If the transmission system indicator blinks when driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with the transmission.

Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the

brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release

button is held down.

Depress the brake pedal first.

When shifting positions in extremely low temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the shift position is displayed. Always confirm you are in the correct shift position before driving.

460

When DrivinguShifting
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without releasing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful when engine braking is needed.

When the transmission is in D:
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the number is displayed in the shift indicator.

The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off.

You can cancel this mode by pulling the + paddle shifter for a few seconds.

The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed temporarily before making a turn.

When the transmission is in D with SPORT mode:
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down, the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.

If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.

You can only pull away in 1st speed.

When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, use the drive mode switch to select other than SPORT mode or pull the + paddle shifter for a few seconds. When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift indicator will turn off.

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode

 

In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter under the following conditions:

Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the higher speed position.

Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest threshold of the lower speed position.

When the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s red zone, the transmission shifts up automatically.

When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts down automatically.

Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back to the normal (D driving mode.

Driving

 

Continued 461

When DrivinguShifting
Driving

 

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation

(- Paddle Shifter

(+ Paddle Shifter

(Shift down)

(Shift up)

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation

 

Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed change.

To change continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next speed.

The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its allowable shifting range.

Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking.

Downshifting when pulling Upshifting when pulling

the (- paddle shifter the (+ paddle shifter

(Changes to lower speed (Changes to higher speed

number) number)

462

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Manual transmission models

 

Shifting

Shift Lever Operation

Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then slowly release the pedal.

Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into R, or shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not “grind.”

When you are not shifting, do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your clutch to wear out faster.

 

1Shift Lever Operation

 

NOTICE

Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.

Shifting to (R before stopping can damage the transmission.

NOTICE

Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not go into the tachometer’s red zone. Should this occur, it can severely damage your engine.

If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometer’s red zone. When this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.

 

Driving

Continued 463

When DrivinguShifting
Driving

 

Shift Up/Down Indicators
Models with A-type meter

Come on to inform you that upshifting or

downshifting is necessary to prevent the

engine from over revving or stalling.

The shift up indicator: Comes on when

upshifting is recommended.

The shift down indicator: Comes on when

downshifting is recommended.

Models with B-type meter

 

1Shift Up/Down Indicators

 

This indicator will not prompt you to downshift to increase engine braking. It is up to you to downshift to increase engine braking when driving downhill.

Always shift down at the appropriate vehicle speed.

The shift down indicator does not come on when downshifting from (2 to (1.

Road and traffic conditions may require you to shift at times other than those indicated.

464

Reverse Lockout
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally shifting into R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain speed.

If you cannot shift to R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:

Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift

lever all the way to the left, and shift to R.

2. If you still cannot shift into R, apply the parking brake, and set the power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Depress the clutch pedal and shift into R.
Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start the engine.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you

have to go through this procedure repeatedly.

When DrivinguShifting

Driving

465

When DrivinguECON Button*
Driving

 

ECON Button*

 

Models with A-type meter

 

ECON Mode Indicator

ECON Button

Models with B-type meter

 

ECON Mode Indicator ECON Button

The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off.

The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the engine, transmission* and climate control system.

1ECON Button*

 

While in the ECON mode, the climate control system has greater temperature fluctuation.

Due to emergency brakes operation or driving conditions, you may not be able to change the mode.

* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop

Continuously variable transmission models

 

Auto Idle Stop

 

To help maximize fuel economy, the engine automatically stops when the vehicle comes to a stop, depending on environmental and vehicle operating conditions. The indicator (green) comes on at this time.

The environmental and vehicle conditions that impact Auto Idle Stop system operation are varied.

 

2 Auto Idle Stop Activates When: P. 469

2 Auto Idle Stop may not activate when:

P. 470

The engine then restarts once the vehicle is

Auto Idle Stop

about to move again, and the indicator

Indicator (Green)

(green) goes off.

2 The Engine Automatically Restarts When:

P. 471

1Auto Idle Stop

 

The 12-volt battery installed in this vehicle is specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop. Using a 12-volt battery other than this specified type may shorten the 12-volt battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace the 12-volt battery, make sure to select the specified type. Ask a dealer for more details.

The duration of the Auto Idle Stop operation:

Increase in the ECON mode, compared to when
the ECON mode is off, with climate control in use.

Models without drive mode switch

ECON Button* P. 466 Models with drive mode switch
Drive Mode Switch* P. 478

Auto Idle Stop Suspend Indicator

 

The Auto Idle Stop suspend indicator comes

on and a message appears on the gauge

when the Auto Idle Stop system cannot be

activated.

Indicators P. 90
Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF P. 468
If the driver’s door is opened while the indicator (green) comes on, a buzzer sounds to notify you that the Auto Idle Stop function is in operation.

A message associated with Auto Idle Stop appears on the driver information interface.

Driving

* Not available on all models Continued 467

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF
1Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF

 

Driving

 

Auto Idle Stop OFF

 

Indicator

Auto Idle Stop

OFF Button

To turn the Auto Idle Stop system off, press this button. The Auto Idle Stop system stops. u Auto Idle Stop system will stop, the

indicator will come on and a message appears on the gauge.

The Auto Idle Stop system is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

If you turn off the Auto Idle Stop system while it is activated, the engine will restart.

If you hold the Auto Idle Stop OFF button, you can disable idle stop messages.

Indicators P. 90
468

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Auto Idle Stop Activates When:
The vehicle stops with the transmission in D and the brake pedal depressed. When you put the transmission into P quickly with depressing the brake pedal, the Auto Idle Stop continues to operate, even if the brake pedal is released.

u If you depress the brake pedal, the engine may automatically restart.

Auto Idle Stop does not activate when:
• The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed.

• The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

• The engine is not adequately warmed up or coolant temperature is high.

• The transmission fluid temperature is low or high.

• The vehicle comes to a stop again before the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5 km/

h) after the engine starts.

The vehicle is stopped on a steep incline.
The transmission is in a position other than D.
The engine is started with the hood open.
u Turn off the engine. Close the hood before you restart the engine to activate Auto Idle Stop.

The battery charge is low.
The internal temperature of the battery is 41°F (5°C) or less.
The climate control system is in use, and the outside temperature is below −4°F (−20°C) or over 104°F (40°C).
The climate control system is in use, and the temperature is set to Hi or Lo.
is ON (indicator on).
Models with drive mode switch

 

The drive mode is in the SPORT mode.
1Auto Idle Stop Activates When:

 

Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated. If the hood is opened, the engine will not restart automatically.

In this case, restart the engine with the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Starting the Engine P. 448
When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow is in operation, the vehicle stops without depressing the brake pedal and Auto Idle Stop may activate. In such cases, the engine may restart if you change the shift position other than (D.

Pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button causes the engine to no longer restarts automatically. Follow the standard procedure to start the engine.

Starting the Engine P. 448
Driving

 

Continued 469

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Auto Idle Stop may not activate when:
• The vehicle is stopped by braking suddenly.

• The steering wheel is operated.

• The vehicle is repeatedly accelerated and decelerated at a low speed.

• The fan speed is high.

• The climate control system is in use, and there is a significant difference between the set temperature and the actual interior temperature.

• The climate control system is in use, and humidity in the interior is high.

• Altitude is high.

 

Driving

470

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
The Engine Automatically Restarts When:
The brake pedal is released (without the automatic brake hold system activated).
The accelerator pedal is depressed (with the automatic brake hold system activated).
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 606

When the transmission is put into P from D or N on a slope.
The engine restarts even if the brake pedal is depressed*1 when:
The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed.
The steering wheel is operated.
The transmission is put into R, S*, or L*, or when it is set from N to D. u If you put the transmission into P after the Auto Idle Stop activates, the Auto Idle Stop continues to operate. In this case, the engine restarts when you
depress the brake pedal.

The pressure on the brake pedal is reduced and the vehicle starts moving while stopped on an incline.
The pressure on the brake pedal is repeatedly applied and released slightly during a stop.
The battery charge becomes low.
The accelerator pedal is depressed.
The driver’s seat belt is unlatched.
is ON (indicator on).
The climate control system is in use, and the difference between the set temperature and actual interior temperature becomes significant.
The climate control system is being used to dehumidify the interior.
The vehicle ahead of you starts again when your vehicle stops automatically with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow.
Models with drive mode switch

 

The SPORT mode is selected by using the drive mode switch.
* Not available on all models Continued

1The Engine Automatically Restarts When:

 

If you are using an electronic device during Auto Idle Stop, the device may temporarily be turned off when the engine restarts.

1The engine restarts even if the brake pedal is depressed*1 when:

*1: With the automatic brake hold system activated, you can release the brake pedal while Auto Idle Stop is in operation.

If the automatic brake hold system has been turned off, or if there is a problem with the system, the engine will restart automatically when you release the brake pedal.

Automatic Brake Hold P. 606
Driving

 

471

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Starting Assist Brake Function
Briefly keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal to restart the engine.

This can keep your vehicle from unexpectedly moving while on an incline.

 

Driving

472

uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop

Manual transmission models

 

Auto Idle Stop

 

To help maximize fuel economy, the engine automatically stops when the vehicle comes to a stop, depending on environmental and vehicle operating conditions. The indicator (green) comes on at this time.

The environmental and vehicle conditions that

 

impact Auto Idle Stop system operation are varied.

1Auto Idle Stop

 

The 12-volt battery installed in this vehicle is specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop. Using a 12-volt battery other than this specified type may shorten the 12-volt battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace the 12-volt battery, make sure to select the specified

Auto Idle Stop

Indicator (Green)

Auto Idle Stop Activates When: P. 475
Auto Idle Stop may not activate when: P. 476
The engine then restarts once the vehicle is about to move again when you depress the clutch pedal, and the indicator (green) goes off.

type. Ask a dealer for more details.

The duration of the Auto Idle Stop operation:

Increase in the ECON mode, compared to when the ECON mode is off, with climate control in use.
2 ECON Button* P. 466

 

The Engine Automatically Restarts When: P. 477
Driving

Auto Idle Stop Suspend Indicator

 

The Auto Idle Stop suspend indicator comes

on and a message appears on the gauge

when the Auto Idle Stop system cannot be

activated.

Indicators P. 90
Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF P. 474
If the driver’s door is opened while the indicator (green) comes on, a buzzer sounds to notify you that the Auto Idle Stop function is in operation.

A message associated with Auto Idle Stop appears on the driver information interface.

* Not available on all models Continued 473

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF
1Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF

 

Auto Idle Stop OFF

 

Indicator

To turn the Auto Idle Stop system off, press this button. The Auto Idle Stop system stops. u Auto Idle Stop system will stop, the

indicator will come on and a message appears on the gauge.

The Auto Idle Stop system is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

If you turn off the Auto Idle Stop system while it is activated, the engine will restart.

If you hold the Auto Idle Stop OFF button, you can disable idle stop messages.

Indicators P. 90
Auto Idle Stop

OFF Button

 

Driving

474

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Auto Idle Stop Activates When:
After the vehicle moves forward, stopping with the brake, the clutch pedal fully depressed, the shift lever in N, and then the clutch pedal is released.

Auto Idle Stop does not activate when:
The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed.
The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
The engine is not adequately warmed up or coolant temperature is high.
The vehicle comes to a stop again before the vehicle speed reaches 2 mph (3 km/h) after the engine starts.
The engine is started with the hood open.
u Turn off the engine. Close the hood before you restart the engine to activate Auto Idle Stop.

The battery charge is low.
The internal temperature of the battery is 41°F (5°C) or less.
The shift lever is in any position except N.
The climate control system is in use, and the outside temperature is below −4°F (−20°C) or over 104°F (40°C).
The climate control system is in use, and the temperature is set to Hi or Lo.
is ON (indicator on).
1Auto Idle Stop Activates When:

 

Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated. If the hood is opened, the engine will not restart automatically.

In this case, restart the engine with the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Starting the Engine P. 448
Pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button causes the engine to no longer restarts automatically. Follow the standard procedure to start the engine.

Starting the Engine P. 448
Driving

 

Continued 475

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Auto Idle Stop may not activate when:
• The steering wheel is operated.

• The fan speed is high.

• The climate control system is in use, and there is a significant difference between the set temperature and the actual interior temperature.

• The climate control system is in use, and humidity in the interior is high.

• Altitude is high.

 

Driving

476

When DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
The Engine Automatically Restarts When:
The clutch pedal is depressed.

The engine automatically restarts even if the clutch pedal is not depressed with the transmission in N when:
The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed.
The pressure on the brake pedal is reduced and the vehicle starts moving while stopped on an incline.
The steering wheel is operated.
The pressure on the brake pedal is repeatedly applied and released slightly during a stop.
The battery charge becomes low.
is ON (indicator on).
The climate control system is in use, and the difference between the set temperature and actual interior temperature becomes significant.
The climate control system is being used to dehumidify the interior.
1The Engine Automatically Restarts When:

 

If you are using an electronic device during Auto Idle Stop, the device may temporarily be turned off when the engine restarts.

The engine does not restart automatically when there is a problem in the system. Follow the normal procedure to start the engine.

Starting the Engine P. 448
The engine does not restart automatically when:

The driver’s seat belt is unlatched.
The transmission is put into a position other than (N. Put the transmission into (N to restart the engine.
NOTICE

Auto Idle Stop system also comes with stall recovery. If you fully depress the clutch pedal after stalling the engine, the engine automatically restarts.

Starting to Drive P. 453
When the system stops operating, follow the normal procedure to start the engine.

Starting the Engine P. 448
Driving

 

477

When DrivinguDrive Mode Switch*
Drive Mode Switch*

 

Constantly controls your vehicle’s engine, transmission, EPS, brakes and VSA® according to the mode you select.

You can choose between three modes, SPORT mode, NORMAL mode and ECON mode by using the drive mode switch.

The current mode is displayed on the driver information interface, and each mode will appear differently.

If you were driving in SPORT or NORMAL mode last time, NORMAL mode is selected when you set the power mode to ON.

If you were driving in ECON mode last time, ECON mode is selected when you set the power mode to ON.

 

SPORT

Mode

 

Driving

NORMAL

Mode

1Drive Mode Switch*

 

The mode may not be able to be changed when:

The vehicle is turning.
The VSA® system is activating.
There is a problem with the engine, the transmission, the VSA®, and the EPS.
ECON

Drive Mode Switch Mode

* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode Switch*

SPORT Mode
Enhances heightened throttle response.

 

NORMAL Mode
Balances handling and riding in all

 

environments.

Driving

Continued 479

When DrivinguDrive Mode Switch*
ECON Mode
Helps you improve your fuel economy by

 

adjusting the performance of the engine,

transmission and climate control system.

 

Driving

480

When DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

 

VSA® helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

 

The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and

VSA® Operation

VSA® System

Indicator

*1

*2

When VSA® activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic brake system. You will also see the indicator blink.

type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*, low tire pressure/TPMS* and safety support indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

Driving

 

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

The main function of the VSA® system is generally

known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The

system also includes a traction control function.

* Not available on all models Continued 481

When DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA® On and Off

VSA® OFF

Indicator

*1

*2

*1 *2

 

Driving

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

This button is on the driver side control panel. To partially disable VSA® functionality/ features, press and hold it until you hear a beep.

Your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but traction control function will be less effective.

To restore VSA® functionality/features, press the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a beep.

 

VSA® is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

 

In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.

When the button is pressed, the traction control function becomes less effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.

482

uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist

Agile Handling Assist

 

Lightly brakes the front wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during cornering.

1Agile Handling Assist

 

The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in all driving situations. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, the agile handling assist does not activate.

You may hear a sound coming from the engine compartment while the agile handling assist is activated. This is normal.

 

Driving

483

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)*
Driving

 

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)*

 

Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are significantly under-inflated.

This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS

Models with A-type meter

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

indicator to come on and a message to appear

on the gauge.

 

Models with B-type meter

 

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)*

 

The system does not monitor the tires when driving at low speed.

Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.

Tire pressure checked and inflated in:

Warm weather can become under-inflated in colder weather.
Cold weather can become overinflated in warmer weather.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of overinflation.

The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire.

Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 668
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on with a delay or may not come on at all when:

You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the steering wheel.
You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
Tire chains are used.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on under the following conditions:

A compact spare tire is used.
Tire chains are used.
* Not available on all models
TPMS Calibration
You must start TPMS calibration every time you:

Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
Rotate the tires.
Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS:

Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 668

Make sure:

The vehicle is at a complete stop.
The power mode is in ON.
Continuously variable transmission models

 

The transmission is in P.
Manual transmission models

 

• The shift lever is in N.

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)*
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)*

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*, low tire pressure/TPMS and safety support indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

 

1TPMS Calibration

TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is

installed.

The calibration process requires approximately 30

minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between

31-62 mph (50-100 km/h).

During this period, if power mode is set to ON and

the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you may

notice the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on

briefly. This is normal and indicates that the

calibration process is not yet complete.

If the tire chains are installed, remove them before

calibrating the TPMS.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even

when the properly inflated specified regular tires are

installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

We recommend that the tires be replaced with the

same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a

dealer for details.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 485

 

Driving

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)*
Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

 

You can calibrate the system from the settings

on the driver information interface.

Press the (home) button, to select Settings, then press the left selector wheel. u Vehicle settings appears on the display.
Roll the left selector wheel.
u TPMS calibration appears on the display.

 

486

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)*
Press the left selector wheel. u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you can select Cancel or Calibrate.

Roll the left selector wheel and select Calibrate, then press the left selector wheel.
u Calibration started screen appears, then the display returns to the customization menu screen.

If the Calibration failed to start message appears, repeat step 4.
The calibration process finishes automatically.

Driving

Continued 487

 

Driving

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)*
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

 

You can calibrate the system from the

customized feature on the audio/information

screen.

Set the power mode to ON.
Press the button.
Select Vehicle Settings.
Select TPMS Calibration.
Select Calibrate or Cancel.
If the Calibration Failed To Start. message appears, repeat step 5.
The calibration process finishes automatically.

488

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – Required Federal Explanation*
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – Required Federal Explanation*

 

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

 

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 489

When DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – Required Federal Explanation*
Driving

 

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

490

When DrivinguBlind Spot Information System*
Blind Spot Information System*

 

When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the appropriate indicator comes on, providing assistance when you change lanes.

How the System works
The system activates when your vehicle is moving forward at about 20 mph (32 km/h) or above.

 

Radar Sensors: underneath the

: Alert zone 1

rear bumper corners

: Alert zone 2

A

B C

Alert zone range

Approx. 1.6 ~ 10 feet (0.5 ~ 3 meters) from vehicle side.
Approx. 10 feet (3 meters) from rear bumper.
Approx. 10 ~ 82 feet (3 ~ 25 meters) behind from rear bumper. (The faster the approaching vehicle, the further away it will be detected.)
The initially set alert zone is alert zone 1. Over time, after the vehicle has been driven on straight roads with traffic and roadside objects, the system will adapt and expand the alert zone (alert zone 1 and 2).

1Blind Spot Information System *

 

Important Safety Reminder

Like all assistance systems, the blind spot information system has limitations. Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes. Overreliance on the blind spot information system may result in a collision.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer in the following situations:

The rear bumper or area around the radar sensors is strongly impacted.
The indicator does not come on even if a vehicle in the alert zone should have been detected.
The rear bumper or any system components need to be repaired.
If the rear bumper or any system components are repaired, the system will revert to alert zone 1 only until it is able to adapt and expand to alert zone 1 and 2.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 491

When DrivinguBlind Spot Information System*
Driving

 

When the system detects a vehicle
Blind spot information system alert indicator:

Comes On

Located on the outside rearview mirror on

both sides.

Comes on when:

Blinks

• A vehicle approaches you from behind to

overtake you at a speed difference of no

more than about 31 mph (50 km/h).

 

You pass a vehicle at a speed difference of no more than about 12 mph (20 km/h).
Blinks and a beeper sounds when:

You use the turn signal lever to signal a turn in

the direction of the detected vehicle while the

blind spot information system alert indicator is

on.

u The beeper sounds three times.

1Blind Spot Information System *

 

For proper blind spot information system operation:

Always keep the rear bumper and area around the radar sensors clean.
Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind.
The system is for your convenience only. Even if an object is within the alert zone, the following situations may occur:

The blind spot information system alert indicator does not come on and the message Blind spot information system not available appears on the driver information interface.
The blind spot information system alert indicator may come on even with the message displayed.
* Not available on all models
When DrivinguBlind Spot Information System*
Blind Spot Information System On and Off
1Blind Spot Information System *

 

Models with A-type meter

 

Left Selector Wheel

Safety Support Switch

Models with B-type meter

 

Right

Selector

Wheel

Safety Support Switch

When you turn the blind spot information system on and off, do the following.

Press the safety support switch.
Models with A-type meter

 

Roll the left selector wheel to the symbol and push it.

Models with B-type meter

 

Roll the right selector wheel to the symbol and push it.
u A message appears on the driver information interface when the system turns on or off.

u A check mark appears in the box and the color of the symbol changes to green when the system is on. The check mark disappears and the color of the symbol changes to gray when the system is off.

 

The blind spot information system will stay on the previously selected on (checked) or off (unchecked) setting each time you start the engine.

You can also select safety support content from the driver information interface.

Driver Information Interface P. 116
Driver Information Interface (Right Side Area) P. 142
You can change the settings for the blind spot information system.

Settings P. 129
Customized Features P. 374
Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 493

When DrivinguBlind Spot Information System*
Driving

 

Blind Spot Information System Conditions and Limitations
The blind spot information system alert indicator may not come on under the following conditions:

There is a large speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle in the adjacent lane.
A vehicle is parked in a side lane.
An object not detected by the radar sensors approaches or passes your vehicle.
The vehicle driving in the adjacent lane is a motorcycle or other small vehicle.
The blind spot information system may not operate correctly under the following conditions:

Making a turn at an intersection.
Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc.) are detected.
An object that does not reflect radio waves well or a motorcycle, is in the alert zone.
Driving on a curved road.
A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent lane.
The system picks up signal interference such as other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.
The rear bumper or the area around the radar sensors is covered by dirt, mud, snow, ice, etc.
The rear bumper or the area around the radar sensors has been damaged or deformed.
In bad weather (heavy rain, snow, and fog).
Making a short turn or driving on a bumpy road that slightly tilts the vehicle.
494

Honda Sensing®

Models with Low Speed Braking Control

 

Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors: the sonar sensors located in the front and rear bumpers, and the front grille, and a front wide view camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.

Models without Low Speed Braking Control

 

Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of a front wide view camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.

 

Driving

Continued 495

Honda Sensing®u
Honda Sensing® has following functions.

The functions which do not require switch operations to activate
• Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) 2 P. 499

• Low Speed Braking Control* 2 P. 511

• Low Speed Braking Control* 2 P. 517

• Road Departure Mitigation System 2 P. 584

• Traffic Sign Recognition System 2 P. 592

The functions which require switch operations to activate
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow* 2 P. 522
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* 2 P. 543
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 2 P. 563

• Traffic Jam Assist* 2 P. 575

Driving

* Not available on all models
Operation Switches for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*/ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*/Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)/Traffic Jam Assist*
Honda Sensing®u
Button

CANCEL Button

 

Interval Button

LKAS Button

 

RES/+/SET/− Switch

Button

Press to activate standby mode for ACC with

Low Speed Follow*/ACC*. Or press to cancel

the system.

LKAS Button
Press to activate standby mode for LKAS and

Traffic Jam Assist*. Or press to cancel these

systems.

CANCEL Button
Press to cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow*/

ACC*.

Interval Button
Press to change the ACC with Low Speed

Follow*/ACC* following-interval.

RES/+/SET/− Switch
Driving

 

Press the RES/+/SET/− switch up to resume

the ACC with Low Speed Follow*/ACC* or

increase the vehicle speed. Press the RES/+/

SET/− switch down to set the ACC with Low

Speed Follow*/ACC* or decrease the vehicle

speed.

* Not available on all models Continued 497

Honda Sensing®u
Gauge Content
Driving

 

498

Models with A-type meter

 

6

Models with B-type meter

 

* Not available on all models

You can see the current state of Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*/

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*, Lane Keeping

Assist System (LKAS) and Traffic Jam Assist*.

aIndicates that ACC with Low Speed

Follow*/ACC* is ready to be activated.

• Green: The system is on.

• White: The system is standby.

• Amber: There is a problem with the system.

bIndicates that LKAS or Traffic Jam Assist* is

ready to be activated.

Green: The system is on.
White: The system is standby.
Amber: There is a problem with the system. cIndicates that LKAS or Traffic Jam Assist* is
activated and whether or not traffic lane lines are detected.

Green lines: The system is on.
White lines: Traffic lane lines are detected.
Amber line: Lane departure is detected. dIndicates whether or not a vehicle is
detected ahead.

Models with B-type meter

 

Control target vehicle: White and outlined in green
Outside of control target vehicle: Gray eIndicates that ACC with Low Speed
Follow*/ACC* shows the set vehicle speed. fIndicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow*/

ACC* shows the set vehicle interval.

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle (including motorcycles) ahead from behind, an oncoming vehicle in front, a pedestrian, or someone riding a bicycle (moving bicycle).

The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as assist in reducing speed, avoiding collisions, and reducing collision severity.

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

Important Safety Reminder

The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collisions nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions.

The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions:

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 504
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Wide View Camera P. 598
When the CMBSTM is activated, it will continue to operate even if the accelerator pedal is partially depressed. However, it will be canceled if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.

Manual transmission models

When the CMBSTM activates, the engine may stop automatically. Start the engine by normal operation if the engine stops.

Starting the Engine P. 448
Driving

 

Continued 499

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

How the system works

When to use

A front wide view camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) or above and will search for a vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle in front of you.

The CMBSTM activates when:

The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle detected in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision.
Your vehicle drives at about 18 mph (30 km/h) or less and there is a chance of in frontal collision with a detected oncoming vehicle when you turn left at an intersection.
Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and the system determines there is a chance of a collision with:
An oncoming or stationary vehicle detected in front of you.
A pedestrian or moving bicycle detected in front of you.
The CMBSTM will be canceled when your vehicle stops or the system determines there no longer is the potential for a collision.

The CMBSTM may also be canceled when a driver operates the steering wheel and the brake or accelerator pedal to avoid a collision.

1How the system works

 

The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect pedestrians.

However, this pedestrian detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your vehicle under certain conditions.

Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection limitations from the list.

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 504
500

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

When the system activates

The system provides visual and audible alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the collision is avoided.

Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.)
Visual Alerts

Beep

Audible Alert

You can change the distance (Long/Normal/Short) between vehicles at which the system’s earliest collision alert will come on through the driver information interface* or audio/information screen* setting options.

Settings P. 129
Customized Features P. 374
Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 501

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

Collision Alert Stages
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of the stages before initiating the last stage.

 

Distance between vehicles

CMBSTM

The sensors detect a vehicle

Audible & Visual WARNINGS

Braking

When in Long, visual and audible

Normal

Stage

Long Short

There is a risk of a collision with the

alerts come on at a longer distance

from a vehicle ahead than in Normal

one

vehicle ahead of you.

setting, and in Short, at a shorter

Your Vehicle

Vehicle

distance than in Normal.

Ahead

Stage

The risk of a collision has increased,

Lightly applied

two

time to respond is reduced.

Your

Vehicle

Vehicle

Ahead

Visual and audible alerts.

Stage

The CMBSTM determines that a collision

Forcefully applied

three

is unavoidable.

Your

Vehicle

Vehicle

Ahead

502

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
CMBSTM On and Off
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

Models with A-type meter

 

Left Selector Wheel

Safety Support Switch

Models with B-type meter

 

Right

Selector

Wheel

Safety Support Switch

When you turn the CMBSTM on and off, do the following.

Press the safety support switch.
Models with A-type meter

 

Roll the left selector wheel to the symbol and push it.

Models with B-type meter

 

Roll the right selector wheel to the symbol and push it.
u A message appears on the driver information interface when the system turns on or off.

u A check mark appears in the box and the color of the symbol changes to green when the system is on. The check mark disappears and the color of the symbol changes to gray when the system is off.

 

The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

You cannot turn the CMBSTM off while driving.

The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the safety support indicator (amber) will come and stay on under certain conditions:

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 504
The CMBSTM is not activated for about 15 seconds after the engine starts.

You can also select safety support content from the driver information interface.

Driver Information Interface P. 116
Driver Information Interface (Right Side Area) P. 142
The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*, low tire pressure/TPMS* and safety support indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 503

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the safety support indicator (amber) will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.

2 Front Wide View Camera P. 598

Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto vehicles, pedestrians, moving bicycles, or road surfaces.
Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions, vehicles, pedestrians, or moving bicycles may not be illuminated).
Roadway conditions
Driving on curvy, winding, undulating, or sloping roads.
There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface.
Driving on rutted roads (snowy or unpaved roads, etc.).
Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
1CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations

 

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).

504

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Vehicle conditions
The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.
Tire chains are installed.
Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals, accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield.
There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The suspension has been modified.

Driving

Continued 505

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Driving

 

Examples of limitations on the correct detection of the camera due to the condition of
the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicles, pedestrians, or moving bicycles

The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle ahead of you is too short.
The vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle suddenly cuts in front of or jumps out in front of you.
The bicycle is stopped.
The oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead of you is sideways.
When the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle blends in with the background, preventing the system from recognizing them.
When several pedestrians or bicycles are moving ahead of you in a group.
When a pedestrian or moving bicycle crosses the road too quickly.
A pedestrian or moving bicycle approaches from the opposite direction.
The headlights of the vehicle ahead of you or oncoming vehicle are lit on one side or not lit on either side in a dark place.
When part of a pedestrian (heads, limbs, etc.) is hidden by load.
When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, when their hands are raised, or they are running.
When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about 6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
When the pedestrian is pushing a stroller or bicycle.
1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

 

Make sure that all the tires are of the same specified size, type and brand, and that they are evenly worn. If you use tires of different sizes, types, brands, or degree of wear, the system may not work properly.

Do not modify the suspension. Altering the height of the vehicle may prevent the system from working properly.

506

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Examples of other limitations on detection or system operation
When the vehicle ahead of you is a small motorcycle, motorcycle with a sidecar, wheelchair, or other specially shaped vehicle.
When a vehicle is lower in the rear than the front such as trucks that are not carrying a load, or a narrow vehicle.
When the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian or moving bicycle is not in front of the vehicle.
The speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian or moving bicycle is significantly large.
When the vehicle or moving bicycle in front of you slows suddenly.
When the driver operates the brake pedal and steering wheel to avoid a collision.
When you approach the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrians or moving bicycles while accelerating rapidly or operating the steering wheel (except when turning left at an intersection etc.)*1
When the moving bicycle is a child-sized bicycle, folding bicycle, three-wheeler or other bicycle with small tires, or a long bicycle like a tandem bicycle.
When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle.
When the minimum ground clearance of a vehicle ahead of you is extremely high.
*1: When there is a possibility of a frontal collision with the oncoming vehicle while turning left, the CMBSTM is activated. However, it may not be activated if you suddenly turn the steering wheel.

Driving

 

Continued 507

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Automatic shutoff
The CMBSTM may automatically shut itself off and the safety support indicator (amber) comes and stays on when:

You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an extended period.
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Driving with the parking brake applied.
The camera temperature gets too high.
The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals, accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (incorrect tire size, flat tire, etc.).
Once the conditions that caused the CMBSTM to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.

 

Driving

508

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

With Little Chance of a Collision
Even if there is little chance of a collision, the CMBSTM may activate under the following conditions:

Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.
Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.
Your vehicle approaches another vehicle at an intersection, etc.

Driving

Continued 509

Honda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
When passing through a low or narrow gate at a speed well over the speed limit.
When there are traffic signs or structures such as guard rails are beside the road along a curve.

When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where the oncoming
vehicle is right in front of you.

 

Driving

When approaching stationary vehicles or walls, such as when parking.
510

uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*

Low Speed Braking Control*

 

Continuously variable transmission models with parking sensor system

Using sonar sensors located on the front and rear bumpers, and the front grille, this system detects if there is danger of a potential collision with a wall or other obstacle during normal driving or when the accelerator pedal is depressed with too much force. The system then assists in avoiding collisions and reducing damage from impact through assistive braking and/or assistive driving power suppression.

1Low Speed Braking Control*

WARNING
The Low Speed Braking Control System cannot avoid all collisions and may not reduce damage in each situation where the accelerator is mistakenly or aggressively pressed. Overreliance on the system may result in a collision with serious injury or death. Always check your surroundings, your shift position, and your pedal use. Driver remains responsible for safely operating the vehicle.

If the Low Speed Braking Control activates in a situation where you do not want automatic brake application (such as when the vehicle is between two railroad crossing gates), simply press the brake pedal to deactivate the system and then continue to drive as intended.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 511

Honda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*
Driving

 

How the System Works
Assistive braking
Assistive braking provides a visual and audible alert when the vehicle is moving between approximately 1 and 6 mph (2 and 10 km/h) and there is the possibility of a collision with a detected wall or other obstacles, as well as providing assistance with braking.

 

Audible Alert

Beep

Beep

The vehicle Driver Stop Remove

applies brake depresses brake after

brake pedal maintaining

stationary

position

If the only rear sensors are turned off using the parking sensor system, the assistive braking is not working when reversing.

Turning off All Rear Sensors P. 619
1Low Speed Braking Control*

 

For directions on the proper handling of the sonar sensors, please refer to the following page.

Sonar Sensors* P. 600
The vehicle will release the brake and start moving a few seconds after the system is activated. To keep the vehicle stopped, keep the brake pedal depressed or put the transmission into (P.

In order to prevent the system from activating when not needed, always turn it off during vehicle maintenance, when loading on ships, trucks, and so on, or when using a chassis dynamometer, free rollers for inspection or when washing the car in conveyor type car wash machine.

* Not available on all models
Assistive driving power suppression
When the vehicle is stopped or moving at less than 6 mph (10 km/h) and there is an obstacle such as a wall detected near the front of or back of the vehicle, if the accelerator pedal is depressed more than necessary, the system will inform you with a visual and audible alert. At the same time, the system will prevent sudden forward or backwards movement by limiting the output of the engine, then assistive braking will activate nearby the obstacle.

 

Beep Audible Alert

Beep

Accidental depression of the accelerator/Limiting the output of the engine

Assistive driving power suppression will not activate in the following situations.

When moving forward:

When on a steep slope or the shift position is in P, R, or N.

When reversing:

When on a steep slope or the shift position is in a position other than R.

If the only rear sensors are turned off using the parking sensor system, the assistive driving power suppression is not working when reversing.

Turning off All Rear Sensors P. 619
Honda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*

Driving

Continued 513

Honda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*
Driving

 

System On and Off

Right

Selector

Wheel

Safety Support Switch

When you turn the system on and off, do the following.

Press the safety support switch.
Roll the right selector wheel to the symbol and push it.
u A message appears on the driver information interface when the system turns on or off.

u A check mark appears in the box and the color of the symbol changes to green when the system is on. The check mark disappears and the color of the symbol changes to gray when the system is off.

 

The system is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

1System On and Off

 

You can also select safety support content from the driver information interface.

Driver Information Interface (Right Side Area) P. 142
The system may temporarily turn off after reconnecting the battery.

The system will automatically turn ON after the vehicle has been moving at over 12 mph (20 km/h) for some time.

If the system does not turn on, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

514

Honda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*
Conditions for Cancellation
Conditions for assistive driving power suppression.

When the accelerator is no longer depressed.
When the accelerator is depressed for approximately four seconds.
When the brake pedal is depressed.
When the steering wheel is turned and a collision avoided.
Conditions for assistive braking cancellation.

A certain amount of time has passed since activation.
Low Speed Braking Control System Conditions and Limitations
The system may not operate correctly in the following conditions:

Examples of obstacles the sonar sensor cannot detect
Obstacles that do not reflect sound waves well, such as people, snow, cloth, sponges, etc.
Thin obstacles such as fences, bicycles, sign posts, etc.
Short or small obstacles.
Obstacles immediately in front of the bumper.
Moving objects or obstacles that suddenly enter the road.
Obstacles that are not perpendicular to the ground.
1Conditions for Cancellation

 

After Low Speed Braking Control has activated once, it will not activate again for the same obstacle. They can be activated again after driving for a certain distance after last activation.

Low Speed Braking Control activates separately when moving forward and reversing. (For example, if it activates when moving forward, it can be activated again immediately if reversing.)

However, if assistive braking has been activated, in order to activate assistive driving power suppression again, it is necessary to drive for a certain distance to reset the system.

Driving

 

Continued 515

Honda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*
Driving

 

Examples of situations where the sonar sensor cannot detect obstacles
• The sonar sensor is dirty (covered by snow, water, mud, etc.).

• The vehicle is too hot or cold.

• The steering wheel is turned sharply when approaching the obstacle at an angle.

Examples of other cases where the system may not work correctly
The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load or suspension modifications.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
Bad weather conditions such as heavy rain, fog, snow, sandstorms, etc.
The ambient temperature/humidity is too high or low.
When going down a very steep slope.
When close to other vehicles with sonar sensors or other objects that emit ultrasonic waves.
Situations where the system may activate even without risk of a collision
• When passing through short or narrow gates.

• When driving on uneven surfaces, grassy areas, or places with steps.

• When a sloped pillar or wall is protruding from a high position.

• When there are obstacles next to the road.

• When driving toward flags, curtains, tree branches, railroad crossing bars, etc.

• When driving on flooded roads.

516

uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*

Low Speed Braking Control*

 

Manual transmission models with parking sensor system

Using sonar sensors located on the front and rear bumpers, and the front grille, this system detects if there is danger of a potential collision with a wall or other obstacle during normal driving. The system then assists in avoiding collisions and reducing damage from impact through assistive braking.

1Low Speed Braking Control*

WARNING
The Low Speed Braking Control System cannot avoid all collisions and may not reduce damage in each situation where the accelerator is mistakenly or aggressively pressed. Overreliance on the system may result in a collision with serious injury or death. Always check your surroundings, your shift position, and your pedal use. Driver remains responsible for safely operating the vehicle.

If the Low Speed Braking Control activates in a situation where you do not want automatic brake application (such as when the vehicle is between two railroad crossing gates), simply press the brake pedal to deactivate the system and then continue to drive as intended.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 517

Honda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*
Driving

 

How the System Works
The Low Speed Braking Control provides a visual and audible alert when the vehicle is moving between approximately 1 and 6 mph (2 and 10 km/h) and there is the possibility of a collision with a detected wall or other obstacles, as well as providing assistance with braking.

 

Audible Alert

Beep

Beep

The vehicle

Driver

Stop

Remove

applies brake

depresses

brake after

brake

maintaining

pedal

stationary

position

If the only rear sensors are turned off using the parking sensor system, the Low Speed Braking Control is not working when reversing.

Turning off All Rear Sensors P. 619
1Low Speed Braking Control*

 

For directions on the proper handling of the sonar sensors, please refer to the following page.

Sonar Sensors* P. 600
The vehicle will release the brake a few seconds after the system is activated. Keep the brake pedal depressed.

In order to prevent the system from activating when not needed, always turn it off during vehicle maintenance, when loading on ships, trucks, and so on, or when using a chassis dynamometer, free rollers for inspection or when washing the car in conveyor type car wash machine.

* Not available on all models
Honda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*
System On and Off

Right

Selector

Wheel

Safety Support Switch

When you turn the system on and off, do the following.

Press the safety support switch.
Roll the right selector wheel to the symbol and push it.
u A message appears on the driver information interface when the system turns on or off.

u A check mark appears in the box and the color of the symbol changes to green when the system is on. The check mark disappears and the color of the symbol changes to gray when the system is off.

 

The system is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

1System On and Off

 

You can also select safety support content from the driver information interface.

Driver Information Interface (Right Side Area) P. 142
The system may temporarily turn off after reconnecting the battery.

The system will automatically turn ON after the vehicle has been moving at over 12 mph (20 km/h) for some time.

If the system does not turn on, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

 

Continued 519

Honda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*
Driving

 

Conditions for Cancellation
A certain amount of time has passed since activation.

Low Speed Braking Control System Conditions and Limitations
The system may not operate correctly in the following conditions:

Examples of obstacles the sonar sensor cannot detect
Obstacles that do not reflect sound waves well, such as people, snow, cloth, sponges, etc.
Thin obstacles such as fences, bicycles, sign posts, etc.
Short or small obstacles.
Obstacles immediately in front of the bumper.
Moving objects or obstacles that suddenly enter the road.
Obstacles that are not perpendicular to the ground.
1Conditions for Cancellation

 

After Low Speed Braking Control has activated once, it will not activate again for the same obstacle. They can be activated again after driving for a certain distance after last activation.

Low Speed Braking Control activates separately when moving forward and reversing. (For example, if it activates when moving forward, it can be activated again immediately if reversing.)

520

Examples of situations where the sonar sensor cannot detect obstacles
• The sonar sensor is dirty (covered by snow, water, mud, etc.).

• The vehicle is too hot or cold.

• The steering wheel is turned sharply when approaching the obstacle at an angle.

Examples of other cases where the system may not work correctly
The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load or suspension modifications.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
Bad weather conditions such as heavy rain, fog, snow, sandstorms, etc.
The ambient temperature/humidity is too high or low.
When going down a very steep slope.
When close to other vehicles with sonar sensors or other objects that emit ultrasonic waves.
Situations where the system may activate even without risk of a collision
• When passing through short or narrow gates.

• When driving on uneven surfaces, grassy areas, or places with steps.

• When a sloped pillar or wall is protruding from a high position.

• When there are obstacles next to the road.

• When driving toward flags, curtains, tree branches, railroad crossing bars, etc.

• When driving on flooded roads.

Honda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*

Driving

521

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
Driving

 

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*

 

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.

When ACC with Low Speed Follow slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your vehicle’s brake lights will illuminate.

When to use

 

A front wide view camera is

located behind the rearview

mirror.

Vehicle speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow: A vehicle is detected ahead within ACC with Low Speed Follow range – ACC with Low Speed Follow operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
No vehicle is detected within ACC with Low Speed Follow range – ACC with Low Speed Follow operates at the speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or above.

Shift position for ACC with Low Speed Follow: In (D or (S*.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow *

 

WARNING
Improper use of ACC with Low Speed Follow can lead to a crash.

Use ACC with Low Speed Follow only when driving on expressways or freeways and in good road and weather conditions.

WARNING
ACC with Low Speed Follow has limited braking capability and may not stop your vehicle in time to avoid a collision with a vehicle that quickly stops in front of you.

Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal if the conditions require.

Important Reminder

As with any system, there are limits to ACC with Low Speed Follow. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.

* Not available on all models
Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
How to activate the system

How to use

(white) is on in the gauge

ACC with Low Speed Follow is ready to use.

■ Press the button on the

steering wheel.

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow *

 

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Wide View Camera P. 598
ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly under certain conditions.

ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations P. 531
When not using ACC with Low Speed Follow: Turn

off adaptive cruise by pressing the button.

Do not use ACC with Low Speed Follow under the following conditions:

On roads with frequent lane change or continuous stop and go traffic, ACC with Low Speed Follow cannot keep an appropriate distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you.
On roads with sharp turns.
On roads with toll collection facilities or other objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access.
On roads with bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.), ACC with Low Speed Follow may not detect the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you properly.
On roads with slippery or icy surfaces. The wheels may spin out and your vehicle may lose the control on the condition.
On roads with steep uphill or steep downhill slopes.
On roads with undulating slopes.
Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 523

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
Driving

 

To Set the Vehicle Speed
(green)

 

*1

RES/+/SET/− Switch

*2

Up or down

On when ACC with Low Speed Follow begins

When driving at about 25 mph (40 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the pedal and press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the switch, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with Low Speed Follow begins.

When driving slower than about 25 mph (40 km/h): If the vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the switch fixes the set speed to about 25 mph (40 km/h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If your vehicle is stationary, you can set the vehicle speed even with the brake pedal depressed.

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

1To Set the Vehicle Speed

 

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/ TPMS* and safety support indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen* between mph and km/h.

Settings P. 129
Speed/Distance Units P. 128, 154
Customized Features P. 374
* Not available on all models
Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
Models with A-type meter

 

Set Vehicle Interval

(green) Set Vehicle Speed

When ACC with Low Speed Follow starts

operating, the vehicle icon, interval bars and

set speed appear on the gauge.

When you use ACC with Low Speed Follow,

Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric

Power Steering system) is activated.

By enabling the steering system to

automatically compensate for natural steering

pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for

you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

Models with B-type meter

 

Set Vehicle Interval

 

Driving

(green) Set Vehicle Speed

Continued 525

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
When in Operation
There is a vehicle ahead
ACC with Low Speed Follow monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with Low Speed Follow range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with Low Speed Follow system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.

To Set or Change Following-interval P. 536
1When in Operation

 

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle cuts in front of you, a beeper sounds, a message appears on the driver information interface.

Driving

 

ACC with Low Speed Follow Range: 394 ft. (120 m)

Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate

interval from the vehicle ahead.

 

Beep

526

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
Models with A-type meter

 

Models with B-type meter

 

Control target vehicle

Outside of control target vehicle

Control target vehicle: White

and outlined in green

Outside of control target vehicle:

Gray

When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed is detected in front of you, your vehicle starts to slow down.

1When in Operation

 

Even if the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC with Low Speed Follow may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances:

The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC with Low Speed Follow detecting range. A vehicle detect beep on and off can be selected.

Settings P. 129
Customized Features P. 374
Limitations

You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe interval when using ACC with Low Speed Follow. Additionally, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly under certain conditions.

ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations P. 531
Driving

 

Continued 527

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
Driving

 

There is no vehicle ahead

Models with A-type meter

A vehicle icon with line contour appears on the gauge.

Models with B-type meter

Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal.

If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.

On steep downhill during ACC with Low Speed Follow, it brakes to inhibit excessive acceleration for maintaining the set speed. However the vehicle speed may become faster than the set speed.

1When in Operation

 

ACC with Low Speed Follow may temporarily control the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle in adjacent lane or surroundings of your vehicle depending on the road conditions (e.g. curves) or vehicle conditions (e.g. operating the steering wheel or the vehicle location in the lane).
When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with Low Speed Follow range.

ACC with Low Speed Follow stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes the set speed.

There are times when the vehicle speed will decrease when the accelerator pedal is lightly applied.

When the vehicle ahead of you moves away, such as when entering an interchange or rest area, ACC with Low Speed Follow may continue to maintain the set following-interval for a short time.
528

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and
1When in Operation

 

slows to a stop

Models with A-type meter

 

(green)

Models with B-type meter

(green)

Your vehicle also stops, automatically. The Stopped message appears on the gauge. When the vehicle ahead of you starts again, the vehicle icon on the gauge blinks. If you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down, or depress the accelerator pedal, ACC with Low Speed Follow operates again within the prior set speed.

WARNING
Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped while the ACC with Low Speed Follow system is operating can result in the vehicle moving without operator control.

A vehicle that moves without operator control can cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.

Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is stopped by ACC with Low Speed Follow.

 

Driving

Continued 529

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
Driving

 

Models with A-type meter

 

(green)

Models with B-type meter

(green)

If no vehicle is ahead of you before you

resume driving, depress the accelerator pedal

and ACC with Low Speed Follow will operate

again within the prior set speed.

530

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC with Low Speed Follow functions.

2 Front Wide View Camera P. 598

Environmental conditions

Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel

or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.

Strong light is reflected onto vehicles or road surfaces.

Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.

Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,

the whole vehicle may not be illuminated).

Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).

Driving

Continued 531

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
Driving

 

Roadway conditions
Driving on curvy, winding, undulating, or sloping roads.

Driving on rutted roads (snowy or unpaved roads, etc.).
Puddles or a film of water is on the road surface.
Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
Vehicle conditions
The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.
Tire chains are installed.
The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals, accessories, stickers, or film of the windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The suspension has been modified.
532

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
Examples of conditions under which the camera may not correctly detect the vehicle ahead of you
A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
When the vehicle ahead of you blends in with the background, preventing the system from recognizing it.
The headlights of the vehicle ahead of you are lit on one side or not lit on either side in a dark place.

Driving

Continued 533

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
Driving

 

Examples of conditions under which the system may not work properly
• A vehicle ahead of you stops and the speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is significantly large.

• When the vehicle ahead of you slows suddenly.

• When the vehicle ahead of you is a specially shaped vehicle.

• When a vehicle is lower in the rear than the front such as trucks that are not carrying a load, or a narrow vehicle.

 

Camera detects upper section of an empty carrier truck.

When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on the edge of the lane.
When the vehicle ahead of you is a narrow vehicle such as a motorcycle.
When the minimum ground clearance of a vehicle ahead of you is extremely high.
When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the vehicle ahead of you.
534

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+/SET/− switch on the steering wheel.

 

To increase speed

To decrease speed

Each time you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
If you keep the RES/+/SET/− switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

 

If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

When you depress the accelerator pedal and then press down and release the RES/+/SET/− switch, the current speed of the vehicle is set.

Driving

 

Continued 535

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
To Set or Change Following-interval
Interval Button

 

Driving

Press the Interval button to change the ACC

with Low Speed Follow following-interval.

Each time you press the button, the following-

interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected

ahead of you) setting cycles through furthest,

far, mid, and nearest following-intervals.

Determine the most appropriate following-

interval setting based on your specific driving

conditions. Be sure to adhere to any

following-interval requirements set by local

regulation.

536

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the nearest, mid, far or furthest following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.

Following-interval

When the Set Speed is:

50 mph (80 km/h)

65 mph (104 km/h)

*1

*2

87.3 feet

110.6 feet

Nearest

26.6 meters

33.7 meters

1.2 sec

1.2 sec

*1

*2

113.4 feet

147.2 feet

Mid

34.6 meters

44.9 meters

1.6 sec

1.6 sec

Far

*1

*2

44.0 meters

57.1 meters

Driving

144.2 feet

187.3 feet

2.0 sec

2.0 sec

*1

*2

175.9 feet

229.6 feet

Furthest

53.6 meters

70.0 meters

2.4 sec

2.4 sec

 

When your vehicle stops automatically because a vehicle detected ahead of you has stopped, the interval between the two vehicles will vary based on the ACC with Low Speed Follow interval setting.

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

Continued 537

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
Driving

 

To Cancel
To cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow, do any of the following:

 

• Press the CANCEL button.

u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).

 

Press the button.

CANCEL Button u indicator (green) goes off.

 

• Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is

Button

moving forward.

u The

indicator (green) on the gauge

changes

to the

indicator (white).

 

1To Cancel

 

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC with Low Speed Follow, you can activate the ACC with Low Speed Follow with the prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) by pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up even if the vehicle is stopped.

When you turn the ACC with Low Speed Follow off by pressing the CANCEL button or depressing the brake pedal, the prior set speed is displayed on the gauge in gray.

When pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up, the ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated with displayed speed.

If the indicator (white) is displayed and you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up, but no prior set speed (in gray) is displayed, the speed will be set to your vehicle’s current speed.

538

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when ACC with Low Speed Follow is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC with Low Speed Follow to automatically cancel:

Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
Abrupt steering wheel movement.
When the ABS, VSA®, CMBSTM, or Low Speed Braking Control* is activated.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on.
When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
When you manually apply the parking brake.
Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
When the detected vehicle within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range is too close to your vehicle.
When accelerating rapidly.
The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals, accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield.
The vehicle is loaded heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.
When passing through a dark place, such as tunnel.
When the parking brake and brake system indicator (amber) comes on.
The vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes to maintain the set speed (for example, you are descending a long slope).
When the system doesn’t detect any driving actions from the driver for a certain amount of time while the LKAS is also activated.
The ACC with Low Speed Follow automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the following causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied.

The driver’s seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary.
The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes.
The engine is turned off.
* Not available on all models Continued

1To Cancel

 

Models with A-type meter

Prior Set Speed (gray)

(white)

Models with B-type meter

Prior Set Speed (gray)

 

Driving

(white)

The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC with Low Speed Follow has been turned off using the button. Press the button to activate the system, then set the desired speed.

539

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control
1To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control

 

ACC with

Interval

Button

Low Speed

Cruise

Follow ON

Control ON

(white)

(white)

 

Press and hold the Interval button for one second. Cruise mode selected appears on the driver information interface for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise.

 

The indicator comes on.

Green: The system is on.
White: The system is standby.
To switch back to ACC with Low Speed Follow, press and hold the Interval button again for one second.

Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle ahead of you.

You cannot switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to

Cruise Control in the following situations:

When the vehicle speed is set.
When ACC with Low Speed Follow is not activated.
You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen* between mph and km/h.

■ When to use

Driving

Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h).

To Set the Vehicle Speed

Take your foot off the pedal and press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down when

you reach the desired speed.

The moment you release the RES/+/SET/− switch, the set speed is fixed, and cruise

control begins. The color of

indicator changes from white to green.

 

When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering system) is activated.

By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

540 * Not available on all models

Settings P. 129
Speed/Distance Units P. 128, 154
Customized Features P. 374
Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Each time you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
If you keep the RES/+/SET/− switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
To Cancel
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:

Press the CANCEL button.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).

Press the button.

u The indicator (green) goes off.

Depress the brake pedal.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).

1To Cancel

 

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled cruise control, you can activate the cruise control with the prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) by pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

When you turn the cruise control off by pressing the CANCEL button or depressing the brake pedal, the prior set speed is displayed on the gauge in gray.

When pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up, the cruise control is activated with displayed speed.

If the indicator (white) is displayed and you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up, but no prior set speed (in gray) is displayed, the speed will be set to your vehicle’s current speed.

Driving

 

Continued 541

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*
1To Cancel

 

Driving

 

Models with A-type meter

Prior Set Speed (gray)

(white)

Models with B-type meter

Prior Set Speed (gray)

(white)

You cannot set or resume in the following situations:

When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
When cruise control is canceled by pressing the button.
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise

control is canceled automatically.

542

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

 

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.

When ACC slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your vehicle’s brake lights will illuminate.

When to use

 

A front wide view camera is

located behind the rearview

mirror.

Vehicle speed for adaptive cruise control: Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h).
Shift position for ACC: In (2 or higher position.
1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

 

WARNING
Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.

Use ACC only when driving on expressways or freeways and in good road and weather conditions.

WARNING
ACC has limited braking capability. When your vehicle speed drops below 22 mph (35 km/h), ACC will automatically cancel and no longer will apply your vehicle’s brakes.

Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal when conditions require.

Important Reminder

As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Use the

brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a

safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.

Driving

 

Continued 543

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Driving

 

How to activate the system

How to use

(white) is on in the gauge

ACC is ready to use.

■ Press the button on the

steering wheel.

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

 

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Wide View Camera P. 598
ACC may not work properly under certain conditions.

ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 550
When the engine speed slows down, try to downshift. When the engine speed goes up, try to upshift. You can maintain the set speed if you change gear within five seconds.

When not using ACC: Turn off adaptive cruise by

pressing the button.

Do not use ACC under the following conditions:

On roads with frequent lane change or continuous stop and go traffic, ACC cannot keep an appropriate distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you.
On roads with sharp turns.
On roads with toll collection facilities or other objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access.
On roads with bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.), ACC may not detect the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you properly.
On roads with slippery or icy surfaces. The wheels may spin out and your vehicle may lose the control on the condition.
On roads with steep uphill or steep downhill slopes.
On roads with undulating slopes.
544

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
To Set the Vehicle Speed
1To Set the Vehicle Speed

 

(green)

*1

*2

RES/+/SET/− Switch

 

Up or down

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), low tire pressure/TPMS* and safety support indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen* between mph and km/h.

On when ACC begins

Take your foot off the pedal and press the RES/+/SET/- switch up or down when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC begins.

When ACC starts operating, the vehicle icon, distance bars and set speed appear on the gauge.

Settings P. 129
Speed/Distance Units P. 128, 154
Customized Features P. 374
Driving

 

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

* Not available on all models Continued 545

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Driving

 

Models with A-type meter

 

Set Vehicle Interval

(green) Set Vehicle Speed

Models with B-type meter

 

Set Vehicle Interval

(green) Set Vehicle Speed

When you use ACC, Straight Driving Assist (a

feature of the Electric Power Steering system)

is activated.

By enabling the steering system to

automatically compensate for natural steering

pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for

you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

546

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
When in Operation
There is a vehicle ahead
ACC monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.

To Set or Change Following-interval P. 555

1When in Operation

 

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle cuts in front of you, a beeper sounds, a message appears on the driver information interface.

ACC Range: 394 ft. (120 m)

Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate

interval from the vehicle ahead.

Beep

Driving

 

Continued 547

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Driving

 

Models with A-type meter

 

Models with B-type meter

 

Control target vehicle

Outside of control target vehicle

Control target vehicle: White

and outlined in green

Outside of control target vehicle:

Gray

When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed is detected in front of you, your vehicle starts to slow down.

1When in Operation

 

Even if the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances:

The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC detecting range. A vehicle detect beep on and off can be selected.

Settings P. 129
Customized Features P. 374
Limitations

You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe interval when using ACC. Additionally, ACC may not work properly under certain conditions.

ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 550
548

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

■ There is no vehicle ahead

Your vehicle maintains the set speed without

1When in Operation

• ACC may temporarily control the interval between

Models with A-type meter

having to keep your foot on the brake or

your vehicle and the vehicle in adjacent lane or

accelerator pedal.

surroundings of your vehicle depending on the

If there previously was a vehicle detected

road conditions (e.g. curves) or vehicle conditions

ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at

(e.g. operating the steering wheel or the vehicle

location in the lane).

the set speed, ACC accelerates your vehicle to

A vehicle icon with line contour

the set speed, and then maintains it.

On steep downhill during ACC, it brakes to

appears on the gauge.

inhibit excessive acceleration for maintaining

Models with B-type meter

the set speed. However the vehicle speed may

become faster than the set speed.

 

Driving

■ When you depress the accelerator pedal

• When the vehicle ahead of you moves away, such

as when entering an interchange or rest area, ACC

You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or

may continue to maintain the set following-interval

visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC range.

for a short time.

ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the

system resumes the set speed.

There are times when the vehicle speed will decrease when the accelerator pedal is lightly applied.

Continued 549

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Driving

 

ACC Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.

2 Front Wide View Camera P. 598

Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Strong light is reflected onto vehicles or road surfaces.
Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions, the whole vehicle may not be illuminated).
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
550

Roadway conditions
Driving on curvy, winding, undulating, or sloping roads.

Driving on rutted roads (snowy or unpaved roads, etc.).
Puddles or a film of water is on the road surface.
Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
Vehicle conditions
The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.
Tire chains are installed.
The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals, accessories, stickers, or film of the windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The suspension has been modified.
Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Driving

Continued 551

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Examples of conditions under which the camera may not correctly detect
the vehicle ahead of you

A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
When the vehicle ahead of you blends in with the background, preventing the system from recognizing it.
The headlights of the vehicle ahead of you are lit on one side or not lit on either side in a dark place.

Driving

552

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

Examples of conditions under which the system may not work properly
• A vehicle ahead of you stops and the speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is significantly large.

• When the vehicle ahead of you slows suddenly.

• When the vehicle ahead of you is a specially shaped vehicle.

• When a vehicle is lower in the rear than the front such as trucks that are not carrying a load, or a narrow vehicle.

 

Camera detects upper section of an empty carrier truck.

When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on the edge of the lane.
When the vehicle ahead of you is a narrow vehicle such as a motorcycle.
When the minimum ground clearance of a vehicle ahead of you is extremely high.
When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the vehicle ahead of you.
Driving

 

Continued 553

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Driving

 

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+/SET/− switch on the steering wheel.

 

To increase speed

To decrease speed

Each time you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
If you keep the RES/+/SET/− switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

 

If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

When you depress the accelerator pedal and then press down and release the RES/+/SET/− switch, the current speed of the vehicle is set.

554

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

To Set or Change Following-interval
Press the Interval button to change the ACC

 

following-interval.

Each time you press the button, the following-

interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected

ahead of you) setting cycles through furthest,

far, mid, and nearest following-intervals.

Determine the most appropriate following-

Interval Button

interval setting based on your specific driving

conditions. Be sure to adhere to any

following-interval requirements set by local

regulation.

 

Driving

Continued 555

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the nearest, mid, far or furthest following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.

Following-interval

When the Set Speed is:

50 mph (80 km/h)

65 mph (104 km/h)

*1

*2

87.3 feet

110.6 feet

Nearest

26.6 meters

33.7 meters

1.2 sec

1.2 sec

*1

*2

113.4 feet

147.2 feet

Mid

34.6 meters

44.9 meters

1.6 sec

1.6 sec

Driving

*1

*2

144.2 feet

187.3 feet

Far

44.0 meters

57.1 meters

2.0 sec

2.0 sec

*1

*2

175.9 feet

229.6 feet

Furthest

53.6 meters

70.0 meters

2.4 sec

2.4 sec

 

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

556

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
To Cancel
To cancel ACC, do any of the following:

Press the CANCEL button.

u The

indicator (green) on the gauge

changes

to the

indicator (white).

Press the

button.

u

indicator (green) goes off.

CANCEL

Button

Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is

moving forward.

Button

u The

indicator (green) on the gauge

changes

to the

indicator (white).

 

Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or more.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).

 

1To Cancel

 

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC, you can activate the ACC with the prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) by pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up.

When you turn the ACC off by pressing the CANCEL button or depressing the brake pedal, the prior set speed is displayed on the gauge in gray.

When pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up, the ACC is activated with displayed speed.

If the indicator (white) is displayed and you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up, but no prior set speed (in gray) is displayed, the speed will be set to your vehicle’s current speed.

 

Driving

Continued 557

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
Driving

 

Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC to automatically cancel:

Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
Abrupt steering wheel movement.
When the ABS, VSA®, CMBSTM, or Low Speed Braking Control* is activated.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on.
When you manually apply the parking brake.
When vehicle speed is less than 22 mph (35 km/h).
Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
When the detected vehicle within the ACC range is too close to your vehicle.
When accelerating rapidly.
The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals, accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield.
The engine is turned off.
The vehicle is loaded heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.
When passing through a dark place, such as tunnel.
When the parking brake and brake system indicator (amber) comes on.
The vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes to maintain the set speed (for example, you are descending a long slope).
When the system doesn’t detect any driving actions from the driver for a certain amount of time while the LKAS is also activated.
Ignoring shift down indication shown in the gauge will cancel the ACC after about 10 seconds.
1To Cancel

 

Models with A-type meter

Prior Set Speed (gray)

(white)

Models with B-type meter

Prior Set Speed (gray)

(white)

The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC has been turned off using the button. Press the button to activate the system, then set the

desired speed.

If the vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) you cannot resume.

* Not available on all models
uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*

The engine speed goes into the tachometer’s red zone.
The engine speed goes to below 1,000 rpm.
You shift into neutral temporarily when shifting into a higher or lower gear.
When the transmission is put into N without depressing the clutch pedal.

Driving

Continued 559

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control

 

Interval

 

Button

Cruise

ACC ON Control ON

(white) (white)

Press and hold the Interval button for one second. Cruise mode selected appears on the driver information interface for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise.

 

The indicator comes on.

Green: The system is on.
White: The system is standby.
To switch back to ACC, press and hold the Interval button again for one second.

Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle ahead of you.

You cannot switch ACC to Cruise Control in the following situations:

When the vehicle speed is set.
When ACC is not activated.
You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen* between mph and km/h.

Driving

 

When to use
Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h).

To Set the Vehicle Speed
Take your foot off the pedal and press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down when you reach the desired speed.

The moment you release the RES/+/SET/− switch, the set speed is fixed, and cruise

 

control begins. The color of indicator changes from white to green.

When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering system) is activated.

By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

Settings P. 129
Speed/Distance Units P. 128, 154
Customized Features P. 374
* Not available on all models
Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Each time you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
If you keep the RES/+/SET/− switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
To Cancel
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:

Press the CANCEL button.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).

Press the button.

u The indicator (green) goes off.

Depress the brake pedal.
u The

indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the

indicator (white).

 

Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or more.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).

1To Cancel

 

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled cruise control, you can activate the cruise control with the prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) by pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.

When you turn the cruise control off by pressing the CANCEL button or depressing the brake pedal, the prior set speed is displayed on the gauge in gray.

When pressing the RES/+/SET/− switch up, the cruise control is activated with displayed speed.

If the indicator (white) is displayed and you press the RES/+/SET/− switch up, but no prior set speed (in gray) is displayed, the speed will be set to your vehicle’s current speed.

Driving

 

Continued 561

Honda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*
1To Cancel

 

Driving

 

Models with A-type meter

Prior Set Speed (gray)

(white)

Models with B-type meter

Prior Set Speed (gray)

(white)

The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC

has been turned off using the button. Press the

button to activate the system, then set the

desired speed.

If the vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) you

cannot resume.

562

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Steering input assist

The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to either of the lane lines.

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

Important Safety Reminders

The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not an autonomous driving system and always requires driver attention and control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.

Front Wide View Camera
Monitors the lane lines

Tactile and visual alerts
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.

The LKAS is convenient when it is used on expressways or freeways.

Do not place objects on the instrument panel. Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.

The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition.

It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

The LKAS may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:

LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 571
Driving

 

When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and resumes after the signals are off.

If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Wide View Camera P. 598
Continued 563

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Lane Keep Support Function
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become stronger.

 

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

 

When it fails to detect lanes, the system will temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the system will recover automatically.

The LKAS may not function as designed while driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with sharp curves.

Driving

564

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Lane Departure Warning Function
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well as a warning display.

 

LKAS indicator (green)

*1

*2

Amber line

Warning Area

Driving

Warning Area

 

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

Continued 565

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
When the System can be Used
The system can be used when the following conditions are met.

The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
The turn signals are off.
The brake pedal is not depressed.
1When the System can be Used

 

If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Be sure to keep the following below to activate the system properly;

• Always keep the windshield around the camera

clean.

• When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to

Driving

 

How to activate the system

LKAS indicator

White lines

(white)

*2

*1

LKAS indicator

(white) White lines

LKAS Button

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

Press the LKAS button.
u LKAS indicator (white) appears on the gauge.

The system is standby.

u If traffic lane lines are detected, white lines appear on the gauge.

apply windshield cleanser to the camera lens.

• Do not touch the camera lens.

• Do not attach a sticker to the area around the

camera.

If LKAS button is pressed when the system can be used, LKAS is on without standby.

566

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Models with A-type meter

 

Green lines

LKAS indicator (green)

Models with B-type meter

LKAS indicator (green)

Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving.
u The LKAS indicator changes from white to green, and white lines change to green once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings.

 

Driving

Green lines

Continued 567

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
To Cancel
Press the LKAS button.

 

The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the

engine, even if you turned it on the last time

you drove the vehicle.

LKAS Button

 

Driving

568

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

■ The system operation is suspended if

1To Cancel

Models with A-type meter

you:

White lines

You can change the setting for the LKAS.

• Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40 mph

LKAS suspended beep on and off can be selected.

(64 km/h) or less.

2 Settings P. 129

u Increasing the vehicle speed to about 45

2 Customized Features P. 374

mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the

LKAS.

 

Depress the brake pedal.
LKAS indicator (white)

u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting

the lane lines again once you release the

Models with B-type meter

LKAS indicator (white)

brake pedal.

• Your vehicle is driving to the right or the left

of the lane.

 

Driving

White lines

When the LKAS is suspended,

green lines on the gauge change

to white lines or disappear, and

the beeper sounds (if activated).

Continued 569

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
The LKAS may be automatically suspended when:
• The system fails to detect lane lines.

• The steering wheel is turned quickly.

• You fail to steer the vehicle.

• Driving through a sharp curve.

• Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 94 mph (150 km/h). Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.

The LKAS may be automatically canceled when:
In the following cases, traffic lane lines may disappear on the gauge, the beeper may sound, and the LKAS may automatically be canceled:

The camera temperature gets extremely high.
The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty.
The ABS or VSA® system engages.

Driving

570

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
LKAS Conditions and Limitations
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of the lane under certain conditions, including the following:

Environmental conditions
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are parallel to white (or yellow) lines.
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions, lane lines or the road surface may not be illuminated).
The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short, and lane lines and the road surface are not visible.
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving

 

Continued 571

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Roadway conditions
Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings.

Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks

• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or

crosswalk.

• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.

 

Very wide or narrow traffic lane

 

Driving

• Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle.

• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.

• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.

572

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white (or yellow) lines.
Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
Driving on roads with double lane lines.
Driving on snowy or slippery roads.
The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road.
There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface.
White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as curves, twists, or hills.
Driving on unpaved or rutted roads.
Passing through an exit or an interchange.

Lane void of lines at exit or

interchange

 

Driving

Continued 573

Honda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Vehicle conditions
When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals, accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.
The suspension has been modified.
Tire chains are installed.

Driving

574

Honda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist*
Traffic Jam Assist*

 

The traffic jam assist system uses a camera mounted to the upper portion of the windshield to detect and monitor left and right white (or yellow) traffic lane lines. Based on inputs from the camera, the system can apply steering torque to keep your vehicle in the center of the detected lane.

How Traffic Jam Assist works
When you are in heavy traffic and Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active, the traffic jam assist system, upon detecting the traffic lane lines, will apply steering torque to help keep your vehicle in the center of the lane.

 

Front Wide View Camera

Detects left and right white

(or yellow) traffic lane lines

When you use the turn signal to indicate a lane change, Traffic Jam Assist is temporarily deactivated. It is reactivated once the vehicle is traveling in the center of the lane and the system has detected the traffic lane lines.

When the driver takes full control of the steering, the steering assist function is temporarily canceled.

The torque applied to the steering may not be noticeable when the driver has full control of the steering, or when the surface of the road is rough or uneven.

1Traffic Jam Assist *

 

Important Safety Reminders

Traffic Jam Assist is for your convenience only. It is not an autonomous driving system and always requires driver attention and control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.

Traffic Jam Assist is convenient when it is used on expressways or freeways.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Wide View Camera P. 598
The Traffic Jam Assist only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The Traffic Jam Assist may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition.

It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

Traffic Jam Assist may not work properly under certain conditions:

Traffic Jam Assist Conditions and Limitations P. 580
Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 575

Honda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist*
Lane Departure Warning Function
When the vehicle enters the warning area, Traffic Jam Assist alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration or an audible alert as well as a warning display.

 

LKAS indicator (green)

*2

*1

Amber line

Driving

Warning Area

Warning Area

 

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

576

Honda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist*
Traffic Jam Assist Activation
Traffic Jam Assist is activated when all of the following conditions exist:

LKAS is activated.
The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
The vehicle is traveling between about 0 and 45mph (0 and 72km/h).
You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
The driver is gripping the steering wheel.
The shift position is in D, S* or L*.
Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in any of the following situations:

You are traveling on a road with sharp curves.
u The system may not allow your vehicle to respond in a manner best suited for the road conditions.

You are entering a toll booth, interchange, service area, or parking area.
You are driving in adverse weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
The surface of the road is slippery; for example, it is icy or covered with snow. u The tires may slip, causing you to lose control of the vehicle.
1Traffic Jam Assist Activation

 

Refer to the following page for proper handling of the LKAS:

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 563
Refer to the following page for steering buttons and displays:

Operation Switches for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*/Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*/ Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)/Traffic Jam Assist* P. 497
Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 577

Honda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist*
How Traffic Jam Assist Works
1How Traffic Jam Assist Works

 

Models with A-type meter

 

Green lines

Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving.

u The LKAS indicator changes from white to green, and white lines change to green once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings.

If your vehicle veers too far to the right or the left of the white (or yellow) traffic lane lines while Traffic Jam Assist is active, deactivate Traffic Jam Assist and have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Honda dealer.

In some cases the system cannot properly detect the traffic lane lines and, as a result, will not provide steering assistance.

Traffic Jam Assist Conditions and Limitations P. 580
Driving

 

LKAS indicator (green)

Models with B-type meter

 

LKAS indicator (green)

Green lines

If the driver takes their hands off the steering wheel

or does not adequately maintain control of steering,

the warning below will appear.

If the driver does not grip the steering wheel after the

warning above has repeatedly appeared, a warning

buzzer will sound and Traffic Jam Assist will be

canceled.

578

Honda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist*
Canceling Traffic Jam Assist
Press the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) button to cancel Traffic Jam Assist.

Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically suspended when:
The system is automatically temporarily canceled under the following circumstances.

The system fails to detect lane lines.
The steering wheel is turned sharply.
You fail to steer the vehicle.
You are driving through a sharp curve.
The brake pedal is depressed.
Once these conditions no longer exist, Traffic Jam Assist automatically resumes.

Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically canceled when:
The traffic lane lines will disappear from the screen, the beeper may sound, and

Traffic Jam Assist will be canceled under the following circumstances:

The temperature of the camera is too high.
The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, is dirty.
1Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically suspended when:

 

You are traveling over 45mph (72km/h).

uWhen the speed of the vehicle reaches 45mph (72km/h), Traffic Jam Assist is deactivated and LKAS is activated instead. Once the speed of the vehicle drops to under 40 mph (64 km/h), Traffic Jam Assist is reactivated.

Driving

 

Continued 579

Honda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist*
Driving

 

Traffic Jam Assist Conditions and Limitations
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of the lane under certain conditions, including the following:

Environmental conditions
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are parallel to white (or yellow) lines.
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions, lane lines or the road surface may not be illuminated).
When the lane lines or road surface are not visible, such as when the distance to the vehicle in front of you is extremely short or when at an intersection.
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
580

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist*

Roadway conditions
Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings.

Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks

• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or

crosswalk.

• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.

 

Very wide or narrow traffic lane

 

Driving

• Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle.

• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.

• Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.

Continued 581

Honda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist*
Driving

 

When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white (or yellow) lines.
Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
Driving on roads with double lane lines.
Driving on snowy or slippery roads.
The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road.
There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface.
White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as curves, twists, or hills.
Driving on unpaved or rutted roads.
Passing through an exit or an interchange.

Lane void of lines at exit or

interchange

582

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist*

Vehicle conditions
When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals, accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.
The suspension has been modified.
Tire chains are installed.

Driving

583

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Road Departure Mitigation System

 

Alerts and helps assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings, or approaching the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border) or a detected oncoming vehicle.

1Road Departure Mitigation System Important Safety Reminder

 

Like all assistance systems, the Road Departure Mitigation system has limitations.

Driving

 

How the System Works

*1

Amber line

*2

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

The front wide view camera behind the rearview mirror monitors left and right lane markings in white or yellow, the outer edge of the pavement (bordered by grass or gravel) or a detected oncoming vehicles.

If your vehicle approaches any detected lane markings, the outer edge of the pavement (bordered by grass or gravel) or a detected oncoming vehicles when the turn signals have not been engaged, the system activates.

u If the system cannot detect lane markings (in white or yellow), no assistance will be provided to avoid approaching oncoming vehicles. In addition to a visual alert, the system assists with steering and alerts you with rapid steering wheel vibrations to help you remain within the detected lane.

Settings P. 129
Customized Features P. 374
As a visual alert, the Lane departure message appears on the driver information interface.

Overreliance on the Road Departure Mitigation system may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane.

The Road Departure Mitigation system alerts you when the system detects that you are approaching the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border), an oncoming vehicle, or drifting into another lane without using a turn signal.

The Road Departure Mitigation system may not detect all lane markings or every instance of lane drift.

The Road Departure Mitigation system may not detect that you are approaching the outer edge of the pavement (bordered by grass or gravel) or an oncoming vehicle.

The Road Departure Mitigation system may not be able to assist you depending on weather, speed or road conditions.

The Road Departure Mitigation system is not activated for about 15 seconds after the engine starts.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Wide View Camera P. 598
The Road Departure Mitigation system may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:

Road Departure Mitigation system Conditions and Limitations P. 588
584

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System
The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid crossing over detected lane markings or approaching the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border) or an oncoming vehicle.

If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system beeps to alert you.

1Road Departure Mitigation System

 

There are times when you may not notice the Road

Departure Mitigation system functions due to your

operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions.

If LKAS is off and you have selected Narrow from the customized options using the driver information interface* or audio/information screen*, the message below will appear if the system has determined that there is a possibility of your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings, the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border) or oncoming vehicle. If you have selected Normal or Wide, however, the message will only appear if the vehicle is about to cross over the outer edge of the pavement or oncoming vehicle.

 

Settings P. 129
Customized Features P. 374
Driving

* Not available on all models Continued 585

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System
How the System Activates
The system activates when all of the following conditions are met:

The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
The turn signals are off.
The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating, braking, or steering.

1How the System Activates

 

The Road Departure Mitigation system may automatically shut off and the safety support indicator (amber) comes and stays on.

Indicators P. 90
The Road Departure Mitigation system function can be impacted when the vehicle is:

Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of a lane.
Driven in a narrow lane.
Driving

586

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off
1Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off

 

Models with A-type meter

 

Left Selector Wheel

Safety Support Switch

Models with B-type meter

 

Right

Selector

Wheel

Safety Support Switch

When you turn the Road Departure Mitigation system on and off, do the following.

Press the safety support switch.
Models with A-type meter

 

Roll the left selector wheel to the symbol and push it.

Models with B-type meter

 

Roll the right selector wheel to the symbol and push it.
u A message appears on the driver information interface when the system turns on or off.

u A check mark appears in the box and the color of the symbol changes to green when the system is on. The check mark disappears and the color of the symbol changes to gray when the system

 

is off.

The Road Departure Mitigation system is in the previously selected on (checked) or off (unchecked) setting each time you start the engine.

You can also select safety support content from the driver information interface.

Driver Information Interface P. 116
Driver Information Interface (Right Side Area) P. 142
When you have selected Warning only*1/Warning Only*2 from the customized options using the driver information interface* or audio/information screen*, the system does not operate the steering wheel.

Settings P. 129
Customized Features P. 374
The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*, low tire pressure/TPMS* and safety support indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

 

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

* Not available on all models Continued 587

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Driving

 

Road Departure Mitigation system Conditions and Limitations
The system may not properly detect lane markings (in white or yellow), the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border) or an oncoming vehicle under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.

Environmental conditions
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Driving on a snowy or wet roadway.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are parallel to white (or yellow) lines.
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions, lane lines, the road surface, or oncoming vehicles may not be illuminated).
The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short, and lane lines and the road surface are not visible.
The outer edge of the road is bordered by objects, materials, etc. other than grass or gravel.
588

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System

Roadway conditions
Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings.
The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or crosswalk.
The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle.
The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white (or yellow) lines.
Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
Driving on roads with double lane lines.
Driving on snowy or slippery roads.
Passing through an exit or an interchange.
The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road.
Driving on unpaved or rutted roads.
White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as curves, twists, or hills.
Driving

 

Continued 589

Honda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Driving

 

Vehicle conditions
When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals, accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield.
Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
When the driver operates the brake pedal and steering wheel.
There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.
Tire chains are installed.
The suspension has been modified.
Examples of limitations on detection due to the condition of oncoming vehicles
The oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead of you is sideways.
The oncoming vehicle jumps out in front of you.
When the oncoming vehicle blends in with the background, preventing the system from recognizing it.
The headlights of an oncoming vehicle are lit on one side or not lit on either side in a dark place.
The distance between your vehicle and the oncoming vehicle is too short.
Part of the oncoming vehicle is not visible due to the vehicle ahead of you.
There are multiple oncoming lanes or turning lanes.
The vehicle in the adjacent lane is parked or moving at an extremely slow speed.
590

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System

Examples of other limitations on detection or system operation
• When the oncoming vehicle is specially-shaped.

• When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the oncoming vehicle.

With Little Chance of a Collision
The Road Departure Mitigation system may activate in the below conditions.

When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming vehicle is right in front of you.

Driving

591

Honda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Driving

 

Traffic Sign Recognition System

 

Reminds you of road sign information, such as the current speed limit your vehicle has just passed through, showing it on the gauge.

How the System Works
When the camera located behind the rearview mirror captures traffic signs while driving, the system displays the ones that are recognized as designated for your vehicle. The sign icon will be displayed until the vehicle reaches a predetermined time and distance.

If the system does not detect any traffic signs while you are driving, the sign icon will not be displayed.

 

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

Speed Limit Sign

The sign icon also may switch to another one, or disappear when:

The end of speed limit or other designated limit is detected.
You make a turn with a turn signal at an intersection.
1Traffic Sign Recognition System

 

Not all signs may be displayed, but any signs posted on roadsides should not be ignored. The system does not work on the designated traffic signs of all the countries you travel, nor in all situations.

Do not rely too much on the system. Always drive at speeds appropriate for the road conditions.

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield that could obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the camera’s field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.

The traffic sign recognition system is not activated for about 15 seconds after the engine starts.

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.

Front Wide View Camera P. 598
You can turn the traffic sign recognition system on and off.

Settings P. 129
Customized Features P. 374
592

Honda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
1Traffic Sign Recognition System

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing.

Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.

If your vehicle exceeds the detected speed limit, an icon representing the speed limit sign for the current area will blink in the display.

2 Settings P. 129

2 Customized Features P. 374

The system’s ability to accurately notify the driver of the speed limit is dependent on certain conditions such as the units displayed on the traffic sign as well as the speed and direction of travel of the vehicle. In some cases, the system may display false warnings or other inaccurate information.

2 Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations P. 594

The unit for speed limits (mph or km/h) varies from country to country. Just after entering a country whose unit differs to the one of the country from which you came, Traffic Sign Recognition System may not work correctly.

2 Settings P. 129

2 Speed/Distance Units P. 128, 154

2 Customized Features P. 374

 

Driving

 

Continued 593

Honda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
Driving

 

Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations
The traffic sign recognition system may not be able to recognize a traffic sign in the following cases.

Environmental conditions
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving at night, in dark areas such as long tunnels.
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.
Roadway conditions
Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.
Vehicle conditions
When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted.
The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals, accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield.
There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the cargo area or rear seats.
The suspension has been modified.
Tire chains are installed.
Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.
1Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations

 

When the traffic sign recognition system malfunctions, appears on the gauge. If this message does not disappear, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

594

The position or the condition of the traffic sign
• The sign is in a place that makes it hard to find.

• The sign is located far away from your vehicle.

• The sign is located where it is hard for headlight beams to reach.

• The sign is on a corner or bend in the road.

• The sign is faded or bent.

• The sign is rotated or damaged signs.

• The sign is covered with mud, snow, or frost.

• Part of the sign is hidden by the trees, or is in the shadow of a vehicle or other object.

• Light (such as a streetlight) is reflected on the surface of the sign, or it is hidden in shadow.

• The sign is too bright or too dark (electric signs).

• Small signs (auxiliary signs, etc.).

Other conditions
When you are driving at a high speed.
Honda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System

Driving

Continued 595

Honda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
The traffic sign recognition system may not operate correctly, such as displaying signs that do not adhere to the actual regulations for the roadway or do not exist at all in the following cases.

u A speed limit sign may display at a higher or lower speed than the actual speed limit.

There is a supplementary sign with further information such as weather, time, vehicle type, school zone, etc.
Figures on the sign are hard to read (electric signs, numbers on the sign are blurred, etc.).
The sign is in the vicinity of the lane you are driving in, even though it is not for the lane, such as a speed limit sign situated at an exit or an intersection between the side road and the main road.
There are things that look similar in color or shape to recognized objects (similar
sign, electric sign, signboard, structure, etc.).

 

Driving

596

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System

Signs Displayed on the Gauge
The speed limit sign icon is displayed on the screen.

 

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

Speed Limit Sign

Speed Limit Sign

Speed Limit Sign

 

Driving

597

Honda Sensing®uFront Wide View Camera
Front Wide View Camera

 

The camera, used in systems such as Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS), Road Departure Mitigation system, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*, Traffic Sign Recognition system, CMBSTM, and Traffic Jam Assist*, is designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate their functions.

Camera Location and Handling Tips
1Front Wide View Camera

 

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally.

Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the camera’s field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a

Driving

 

Front Wide View Camera

 

This camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing.

Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.

genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.

Do not place an object on the top of the instrument panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent the system from detecting lane lines properly.

* Not available on all models
Honda Sensing®uFront Wide View Camera
1Front Wide View Camera

If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate: Camera temperature too high message appears:

Use the climate control system to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed towards the camera.
Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.

If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate:

Clean front windshield or poor viewing

condition. message appears:

• Park your vehicle in a safe place, and make sure the

windshield is clean.

 

Clean the windshield if it is dirty. If the message

does not disappear after driven for a while, have

your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

599

Honda Sensing®uSonar Sensors*
Driving

 

Sonar Sensors*

 

Location and range of sensors
The sonar sensors are situated in the front and rear bumpers, and the front grille.

 

Sonar Sensors Sonar Sensors

 

1Sonar Sensors *

 

For the sonar sensors to work properly, do not:

Place stickers or other objects on or around the sensors.
Hit the area around the sensors.
Attempt to take apart any sensor.
Put any accessories on or around the sensors.
Consult with a dealer if:

A sensor has been subjected to shock.
Work needs to be done to the area around a sensor.
In the following cases, the sonar sensors may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

The front or rear bumper has made contact with a hill, parking block, curb, embankment, etc.
The vehicle has been involved in frontal or rear collision.
The vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle.
Sensor Range

* Not available on all models
Braking

Brake System

Parking Brake

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it.

1Parking Brake

 

You may hear the electric parking brake system motor operating from the rear wheel area when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.

Electric Parking

 

Brake Switch

 

Electric Parking

Brake Switch

To apply
The electric parking brake can be applied any time the vehicle has battery, no matter which position the power mode is in.

Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently and securely.

u The indicator in the switch comes on.

u The parking brake and brake system

indicator (red) comes on.

To release
The power mode must be in ON in order to release the electric parking brake.

Depress the brake pedal.
Press the electric parking brake switch. u The indicator in the switch goes off. u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) goes off.

Manually releasing the parking brake using the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and smoothly when facing downhill on steep hills.

The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric parking brake system operation when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.

You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the battery goes dead.

If the Battery Is Dead P. 702
If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch while driving, the brakes on all four wheels are applied by the VSA® system until the vehicle comes to a stop. The electric parking brake then applies, and the switch should be released.

Driving

 

Continued 601

BrakinguBrake System
Continuously variable transmission models

1Parking Brake

■ Automatic parking brake feature

operation

In the following situations, the parking brake

If the automatic parking brake feature has been activated:

automatically operates.

• The parking brake is applied automatically when you set the power mode to

• When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake

VEHICLE OFF.

hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.

• To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake

• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while

your vehicle is stopped and brake hold is applied.

system indicator (red) is on.

• When the engine is turned off, except by Auto Idle

2 Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature P. 604

Stop system, while brake hold system is applied.

■ To release automatically

• When there is a problem with the brake hold

system while brake hold is applied.

 

Continuously variable transmission models

Models with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake.

with Low Speed Follow

Use the accelerator pedal to release the parking brake when you are starting the

• When the vehicle stops more than 10 minutes

vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.

while Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low

Speed Follow is activated.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Driving

• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while

When on a hill, it may require more

your vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with

Low Speed Follow.

accelerator input to release.

• When the engine is turned off, except by Auto Idle

u The parking brake and brake system

Stop system, while ACC with Low Speed Follow is

indicator (red) goes off.

activated.

Accelerator Pedal

 

You can release the parking brake automatically when:

You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.
The engine is running.
The transmission is not in P or N.
602

BrakinguBrake System
Manual transmission models

 

Depress the accelerator pedal while releasing the clutch pedal releases the parking brake.

Use the accelerator pedal to release the parking brake when you are starting the vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.

1Parking Brake

 

If the parking brake cannot be released automatically, release it manually.

When the vehicle is traveling uphill, the accelerator pedal may need to be pressed farther to

Clutch Pedal

 

Accelerator

Pedal

Gently depress the accelerator pedal and release the clutch pedal.

u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off.

The parking brake automatically releases as you depress the accelerator pedal when:

You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.
The engine is running.
The transmission is not in N.
automatically release the electric parking brake.

The parking brake cannot be released automatically while the following indicators are on:

Malfunction indicator lamp
Transmission system indicator*
The parking brake may not be released automatically while the following indicators are on:

Parking brake and brake system indicator (red)
VSA® system indicator
ABS indicator
Supplemental restraint system indicator
Manual transmission models

The clutch pedal is fully depressed before gently depress the accelerator pedal and release the clutch pedal.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 603

BrakinguBrake System
Driving

 

Continuously variable transmission models

 

Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature
With the power mode is in ON, carry out the following steps to either activate or deactivate the automatic parking brake feature.

Put the transmission into P.
Without depressing the brake pedal, pull up and release the electric parking brake switch.
u Check that the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) has come on.

Pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch. When you hear a beeping sound, release the switch and within 3 seconds pull up and hold the switch again.
When you hear a sound indicating that the procedure is completed, release the switch.
u Two beeps indicates that the feature has been activated. u One beep indicates that the feature has been deactivated.

u When you have completed activating the feature, the parking brake will remain applied after you turn off the engine.

u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) is on.

If you need to temporarily deactivate the feature while putting your vehicle through a conveyor type car wash, you can follow the procedure explained below.

Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop.
Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and then within 2 seconds push down the electric parking brake switch.
u Activation and deactivation settings for the feature will not be affected. u Before temporarily deactivating the feature, make sure to first turn off both

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow and the automatic brake hold system.

1Parking Brake

 

In cold climates, the parking brake may freeze in place if applied.

When parking the vehicle, chock the wheels and make sure the automatic parking brake feature is deactivated.

Also, when putting your vehicle through a conveyor-type car wash or when having your vehicle towed, deactivate the automatic parking brake feature and leave the parking brake released.

604

BrakinguBrake System
u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) is on.

Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist helps to reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.

Brake Assist System P. 612
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 611
1Foot Brake

 

Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times.

If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the rotating brake disc.

Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower gear/speed position. With manual transmission use a lower gear for greater engine braking.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

Driving

 

Continued 605

BrakinguBrake System
Automatic Brake Hold

Continuously variable transmission models

Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at traffic lights and in heavy traffic.

1Automatic Brake Hold

 

WARNING
Activating the automatic brake hold system on steep hills or slippery roads may still allow the vehicle to move if you remove your foot from the brake pedal.

Driving

 

Turning on the system

Comes

On

Automatic Brake Hold Button

Activating the system

On

Comes

On

U.S.

Comes

Brake Pedal

On

Canada

Fasten your seat belt properly, then start the engine. Press the automatic brake hold button.

u The automatic brake hold system indicator comes on. The system is turned on.

Depress the brake pedal to come to a complete stop. The transmission must not be in P or R.

u The automatic brake hold indicator comes on. Braking is kept for up to 10 minutes.

u Release the brake pedal after the automatic brake hold indicator comes on.

If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.

Never activate the automatic brake hold system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from moving when stopped on a steep hill or slippery roads.

Continuously variable transmission models

WARNING
Using the automatic brake hold system to park the vehicle may result in the vehicle unexpectedly moving.

If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.

Never leave the vehicle when braking is temporarily kept by automatic brake hold and always park the vehicle by putting the transmission in (P and applying the parking brake.

606

BrakinguBrake System
Canceling the system

On

Goes

Off

Accelerator Pedal

Depress the accelerator pedal while the transmission is in a position other than P or N. The system is canceled and the vehicle starts to move.

u The automatic brake hold indicator goes off. The system continues to be on.

1Automatic Brake Hold

 

While the system is activated, you can turn off the engine or park the vehicle through the same procedure as you normally do.

When Stopped P. 613
Whether the system is on, or the system is activated, the automatic brake hold turns off once the engine is off.

You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves while the automatic brake hold system is in operation.

Manual transmission models

 

The system turns off if the engine stalls while

automatic brake hold is active or the system is on.

Driving

Continued 607

BrakinguBrake System
Manual transmission models

 

Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until you shift into one of the gears other than N and:

Release the clutch pedal on a level road or when facing downhill.
Release the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal when facing uphill. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at traffic lights and in heavy traffic.
Driving

 

Turning on the system

Comes

On

Automatic Brake Hold Button

Activating the system

On

Comes

On

U.S.

Comes

Brake Pedal

On

Canada

Fasten your seat belt properly, then start the

engine. Press the automatic brake hold

button.

u The automatic brake hold system

indicator comes on. The system is turned

on.

Depress the brake pedal to come to a

complete stop.

u The automatic brake hold indicator

comes on. Braking is kept for up to 10

minutes.

u Release the brake pedal after the

automatic brake hold indicator comes

on.

608

Canceling the system
Clutch Pedal

Shift into one of the gears other than N and:

u Release the clutch pedal on a level road

On

or when facing downhill.

Goes

u Release the clutch pedal and depress the

accelerator pedal when facing uphill.

Off

The system is canceled and the vehicle

starts to move.

Accelerator Pedal

u The automatic brake hold indicator goes

off.

The system continues to be on.

 

The system automatically cancels when:
• You engage the parking brake.

Continuously variable transmission models

 

You depress the brake pedal and put the transmission into P or R.
The system automatically cancels and the parking brake is applied when:
• Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes.

• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.

• The engine is turned off.

• There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.

Manual transmission models

 

The engine stalls.
BrakinguBrake System

Driving

Continued 609

BrakinguBrake System
Turning off the automatic brake hold system
1Turning off the automatic brake hold system

 

Automatic Brake

 

Hold Button

 

Goes

Off

While the system is on, press the automatic brake hold button again.

u The automatic brake hold system indicator goes off.

If you want to turn off automatic brake hold while the system is in operation, press the automatic brake hold button with the brake pedal depressed.

Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold system before using an automated car wash.

Driving

610

uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

ABS

Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you can.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.

You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as “stomp and steer.”

ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Depress the brake pedal and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on:

Wet or snow covered roads.
Roads paved with stone.
Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

 

NOTICE

The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of the incorrect size or type.

If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system.

While normal braking will not be affected, there is a possibility that the ABS will not be operating. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to skidding and loss of steering control.

In the following cases, your vehicle may need more distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS:

You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces, such as gravel or snow.
The tires are equipped with tire chains.
The following may be observed with the ABS system:

Motor sounds coming from the engine compartment when the brakes are applied, or when system checks are being performed after the engine has been started and while the vehicle accelerates.
Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when
ABS activates.

These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS systems and are no cause for concern.

Driving

 

611

BrakinguBrake Assist System
Brake Assist System

 

Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.

When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

 

Driving

612

Parking Your Vehicle

When Stopped

 

Depress the brake pedal firmly.
With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly, but fully.
Continuously variable transmission models

 

Change the shift position to P.
Turn off the engine.
u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off in about 30 seconds.

Manual transmission models

 

Move the shift lever to N.
Turn off the engine and move the shift lever to R or 1.
u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off in about 30 seconds.

1Parking Your Vehicle

 

Continuously variable transmission models

WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged.

A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the shift position indicator.

1When Stopped

Continuously variable transmission models

NOTICE

The following can damage the transmission:

Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously.
Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by depressing the accelerator pedal.
Putting the transmission into (P before the vehicle stops completely.
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber.

Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

Driving

 

Continued 613

Parking Your VehicleuWhen Stopped
Always set the parking brake, in particular if you are parked on an incline.

 

1When Stopped

 

In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from moving. If you do not take either precaution, the vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.

Driving

614

Parking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
Parking Sensor System*

 

The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the beeper, driver information interface and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance between your vehicle and the obstacle.

The sensor location and range

Front Corner Sensors Front Center Sensors

Rear Corner Sensors Rear Center Sensors

Front: Within about 35 in (90 cm) or less

Within about 24 in (60 cm) or less

Rear: Within about 43 in (110 cm) or less

1Parking Sensor System*

 

Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.

The system may not work properly when:

The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud, or dirt.
The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass, bumps, or a hill.
The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather.
The system is affected by devices that emit ultrasonic waves.
Driving in bad weather.
The system may not sense:

Thin or low objects.
Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton, or sponge.
Objects directly under the bumper.
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.

Driving

 

* Not available on all models Continued 615

Parking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
Driving

 

Parking sensor system on and off
With the power mode in ON, press the parking sensor system button to turn on or off the system. The indicator in the button comes on when the system is on.

 

The front corner, rear corner and rear center sensors start to detect an obstacle when the transmission is in R, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

The front corner and front center sensors start

to detect an obstacle when the transmission is

in any position other than P* or R, and the

vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Manual transmission models

 

You also need to release the parking brake.

1Parking Sensor System*

 

When you set the power mode to ON, the system will be in the previously selected condition.

* Not available on all models
uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

■ Screen Operation

1Screen Operation

 

Split View Off

 

Split Screen

Tab

Split View On

You can switch between split view off and split view on by touching the split screen tab.

The split screen tab disappears, and the split view returns to the last camera view mode under the following conditions:

If there is a malfunction in the system.

Driving

Continued 617

Parking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
Driving

 

When the distance between your vehicle and detected obstacles becomes shorter

Interval

Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle

Driver information

between

Indicator

Audio/Information Screen

Corner Sensors

Center Sensors

interface

beeps

Front: About 35-24 in

Moderate

(90-60 cm)

Comes on*1/

Rear: About 43-24 in

Blinks*2 in Yellow*3

(110-60 cm)

Indicators light up

Indicators light up where the

sensor detects an obstacle.

About 24-18 in

About 24-18 in

where the sensor

Short

(60-45 cm)

(60-45 cm)

Comes on*1/

detects an obstacle.

Blinks*2 in Amber

About 18-14 in

About 18-14 in

Indicators light up where the

Very short

sensor detects an obstacle.

(45-35 cm)

(45-35 cm)

Continuous

About 14 in

About 14 in

Comes on*1/

Indicators light up where the

(35 cm) or less

(35 cm) or less

Blinks*2 in Red

sensor detects an obstacle.

*1:On the driver information interface

*2:On the audio/information screen

*3:At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.

618

Parking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*
Turning off All Rear Sensors
Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF.

Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON.
Keep pressing the button for 10 seconds. Release the button when the indicator in the button flashes.
u The beeper sounds once.

Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off.
u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.

To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds three times when the rear sensors come back on.

1Turning off All Rear Sensors

 

When you put the transmission into (R, the indicator in the parking sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the rear sensors have been turned off.

 

Driving

619

Parking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
Driving

 

Cross Traffic Monitor*

 

Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.

The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.

1Cross Traffic Monitor*

 

CAUTION
Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all approaching vehicles and may not detect an approaching vehicle at all.

Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to back up the vehicle before doing so may result in a collision.

Do not solely rely on the system when reversing; always also use your mirrors, and look behind and to the sides of your vehicle before reversing.

The parking sensor system’s alerting buzzer overrides the Cross Traffic Monitor buzzer when the sensors are detecting obstacles at the closest range.

* Not available on all models
Parking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
How the System Works
1Cross Traffic Monitor*

 

Radar sensors:

 

Underneath the rear bumper

corners

The system activates when:

The power mode is in ON.
The Cross Traffic Monitor is turned on.
Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 623
The transmission is in R.
Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or lower.
Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect or may delay alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without an approaching vehicle under the following conditions:

• An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall,

near your vehicle’s rear bumper, is blocking the

radar sensor’s scope.

• Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph

(5 km/h) or higher.

• A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than

between about 6 mph (10 km/h) and 16 mph (25

km/h).

• The system picks up external interference such as

other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong

 

radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.

When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.

The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly behind your vehicle.

The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects.

• Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with

snow, ice, mud or dirt.

• When there is bad weather.

• Your vehicle is on an incline.

• Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear.

• Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a

vehicle, and so on.

The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper corner area clean.

Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind.

Driving

* Not available on all models Continued 621

Parking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
Driving

 

When the System Detects a Vehicle

Arrow Icon

Normal View Wide View Top Down View

An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information screen.

1When the System Detects a Vehicle

 

If the on the lower right changes to in amber when the transmission is in (R, mud, snow or ice, etc. may have accumulated in the vicinity of the sensor. The system is temporarily canceled. Check the bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly clean the area if necessary.

If the comes on when the transmission is in (R, there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

If the display remains the same with the transmission in (R, there may be a problem with the rear camera system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system.

Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

622

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*

Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off
Cross Traffic Monitor icon

 

The system can be turned on and off on the

audio/information screen by pressing the

Cross Traffic Monitor icon.

You can also switch the system on and off

from the customized feature on the audio/

information screen.

Customized Features P. 374

Driving

623

Multi-View Rear Camera

Driving

 

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

 

The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view.

The display automatically changes to the rear view when the transmission is put into

.
Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area

Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)

Approx. 39 inches (1 m)

Camera

You can view three different camera modes on the rearview display.

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

 

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are.

Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.

The rear camera view is displayed prior to the audio/ information screen.

If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.

You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic Guideline settings.

Customized Features P. 366, 374
Fixed Guideline

ON: Guidelines appear when you put the transmission into (R.

OFF: Guidelines do not appear.

Dynamic Guideline

ON: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction.

OFF: Guidelines do not move.

624

uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera

 

Wide view mode

Normal view mode

Top down view mode

Bumper Bumper Bumper

If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into R.
If you were using Top down view mode before you turned off the engine, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you set the power mode to ON and put the transmission into R.
If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took the transmission out of R, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into R.
If you were using Top down view mode and put the transmission back into R within 10 seconds after you took it out of R, Top down view mode will be activated.
Driving

 

625

Refueling

Driving

 

Fuel Information

Fuel recommendation

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage.

Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid buildup of deposits in your engine and emission control system.

For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

Fuel tank capacity: 12.39 US gal (46.9 L)
1Fuel Information

 

NOTICE

We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.

Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.

626

RefuelinguHow to Refuel
How to Refuel

 

Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler nozzle.

1How to Refuel

 

WARNING
Press

 

Fuel Fill Door

Stop your vehicle with the service station pump on the left side of the vehicle in the rear.
Turn off the engine.
Unlock the driver’s door.
u The fuel fill door on the outer side of the vehicle will unlock.

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 172
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flames away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
Press and release the area indicated by the arrow to release the fuel fill door. You will hear a click and the lid will open slightly.
Manually pull the fuel fill door to a fully open position.
The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon fuel for other uses) or other non-service station devices can damage the area in and around the filler opening.

Driving

 

Continued 627

RefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving

 

Place the end of the filler nozzle on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the filler nozzle goes down along with the filler pipe.

u Keep the filler nozzle level.

u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will click off automatically.

u If you do not fill up the tank to full, always add a minimum of 1.3 US gal (5 L) of fuel.

u After filling, wait about five seconds

before removing the filler nozzle.

Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

1How to Refuel

 

Use the lock tab or the master door lock switch to unlock the fuel fill door.

The vehicle doors and fuel fill door automatically relock if the remote unlock function is used. This can be deactivated by briefly opening then closing the driver’s door.

If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.

The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature.

Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity.

If you repeatedly fill the tank with less than the specified minimum amount of fuel, the malfunction indicator lamp may come on. If this happens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container P. 723
628

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions

Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions

 

Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the driver information interface.

Use engine oil with the viscosity recommended.
2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 648

Maintain the specified tire pressure.
Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside adds weight and increases wind resistance.
1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions

 

Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving.

Miles driven

Gallons of

Miles per

fuel

Gallon

100

Liters of

Kilometers

L per 100 km

fuel

driven

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test. For more information on how this test is performed, please visit https://www.nrcan.gc.ca and search for “fuel consumption testing” in the search field at the top of the page.

 

Driving

629

Turbo Engine Vehicle*

Driving

 

Handling Precautions

 

The turbocharger is a high-precision device to obtain greater horsepower by delivering a large volume of compressed air into the engine using a turbine driven by the engine’s exhaust gas pressure.

When the engine is cold just after starting, avoid hard or sudden acceleration.
Always replace the engine oil and engine oil filter according to the Maintenance MinderTM. The turbine rotates at very high speeds over 100,000 rpm and its temperature reaches over 1,292°F (700°C). It is lubricated and cooled by engine oil. If you fail to replace the engine oil and filter at the scheduled distance or interval, deteriorated engine oil may cause failure such as sticking and abnormal noise of the turbine bearing.
1Turbo Engine Vehicle *

 

The scheduled maintenance intervals for replacing the filter is indicated on the driver information interface. Follow the information on replacement timing.

Maintenance MinderTM P. 635
The Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. or Engine temperature near limit. Avoid heavy acceleration and high speed. message may appear on the driver information interface when you restart the engine after driving under high load conditions such as at high speed or in hilly terrain.

This is normal. The message goes off after you idle or drive the vehicle for about one minute.

Models with B-type meter

The temperature gauge pointer is at the H mark when you restart the engine after driving under high load conditions such as at high speed or in hilly terrain. This is normal. The gauge goes down after you idle or drive the vehicle for about one minute.

* Not available on all models
Maintenance

This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance

Engine Coolant …………………………..

655

Tire and Wheel Replacement ………..

674

Inspection and Maintenance …………

632

Transmission Fluid……………………….

657

Tire Rotation………………………………

675

Safety When Performing Maintenance ….

633

Brake/Clutch* Fluid ……………………..

658

Winter Tires ……………………………….

676

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance

Refilling Window Washer Fluid………

659

Battery………………………………………..

678

Service …………………………………….

634

Replacing Light Bulbs …………………..

660

Remote Transmitter Care

Maintenance MinderTM …………………

635

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades ….

665

Replacing the Remote Battery ……….

680

Maintenance Under the Hood

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Climate Control System Maintenance ….

681

Maintenance Items Under the Hood ….

645

Checking Tires ……………………………

668

Cleaning

Opening the Hood ………………………

647

Tire and Loading Information Label …

669

Interior Care ………………………………

682

Recommended Engine Oil …………….

648

Tire Labeling ………………………………

669

Exterior Care………………………………

684

Oil Check …………………………………..

649

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)….

671

Accessories and Modifications

Adding Engine Oil……………………….

651

Wear Indicators…………………………..

673

Accessories ………………………………..

687

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter…..

652

Tire Service Life …………………………..

673

Modifications……………………………..

688

* Not available on all models 631

Before Performing Maintenance

Maintenance

 

Inspection and Maintenance

 

For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.)

Types of Inspection and Maintenance
Routine inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling.

2 Maintenance P. 34

Periodic inspections
Check the brake/clutch* fluid level monthly.
2 Brake/Clutch* Fluid P. 658

Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 668

Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
Replacing Light Bulbs P. 660
Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 665
1Inspection and Maintenance

 

U.S. models

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are “certified” to EPA standards.

According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the driver information interface.

Maintenance Service Items P. 640
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com.

Authorized Manuals P. 737
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet.

* Not available on all models
Before Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance

 

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task.

Maintenance Safety
To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire.

To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.
Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
Vehicle Safety
The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off.

Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts.

Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away from moving parts.

u Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated.

1Safety When Performing Maintenance

 

WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner’s manual.

WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner’s manual.

Maintenance

 

633

Before Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

 

The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

 

1Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

 

2.0 L engine models

NOTICE

Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts.

Maintenance

634

Maintenance MinderTM

If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages appear on the driver information interface every time you set the power mode to ON. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.

 

Maintenance

635

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance

 

To Use Maintenance MinderTM

 

Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the engine oil, appear on the driver information interface.

You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.

Models with A-type meter

 

Set the power mode to ON.
Press the (home) button.
Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed.
Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance Minder screen. The engine oil life appears on the driver information interface along with maintenance items due soon.

Engine Oil Life

Left Selector Wheel

(home) Button

Main Item

Sub Item

1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

 

Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.

Displayed Engine Oil

Calculated Engine Oil

Life (%)

Life (%)

100

100 to 91

90

90 to 81

80

80 to 71

70

70 to 61

60

60 to 51

50

50 to 41

40

40 to 31

30

30 to 21

20

20 to 16

15

15 to 11

10

10 to 6

5

5 to 1

0

0

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the driver information interface.

Maintenance Service Items P. 640
636

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Models with B-type meter

 

Set the power mode to ON.
Roll the right selector wheel until the Maintenance Minder screen is displayed. The engine oil life appears on the driver information interface along with maintenance items due soon.

Engine Oil Life

Sub Item

Right Selector Wheel

Main Item

 

Maintenance

Continued 637

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance

 

Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information Interface

Maintenance Message

Oil Life Display

Explanation

Information

*1

*2

When you select the

Maintenance Minder screen,

it displays codes for

maintenance items due at

the next engine oil change,

along with the percentage of

engine oil life remaining.

Maintenance Due Soon

15 %

The remaining engine oil life

The engine oil is approaching

*1

*2

is 15 to 6 percent.

the end of its service life, and

the maintenance items should

Models with A-type meter

be inspected and serviced

Press the

(home) button

to switch

another display. soon.

to

Models with B-type meter

Roll the right selector wheel

to switch to another display.

*1:Models with A-type meter

*2:Models with B-type meter

638

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance Message

Oil Life Display

Explanation

Information

Maintenance Due Now

5 %

The remaining engine oil life

The engine oil has almost

*1

*2

is 5 to 1 percent.

reached the end of its service

life, and the maintenance items

Models with A-type meter

should be inspected and

Press the

(home) button

to switch

another display.

serviced as soon as possible.

to

Models with B-type meter

Roll the right selector wheel

to switch to another display.

The engine oil life has passed

The engine oil life has passed.

its service life, and a negative

The maintenance items must

Maintenance Past Due

Negative Distance

distance appears after driving

be inspected and serviced

over 10 miles (U.S. models) or

immediately.

*1

*2

10 km (Canadian models).

The negative distance on the

display blinks.

Models with A-type meter

Press the

(home) button

to switch

to

another display.

Models with B-type meter

Roll the right selector wheel

to switch to another display.

*1:Models with A-type meter

*2:Models with B-type meter

The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.

Maintenance

 

Continued 639

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance Service Items

Maintenance Minder Message

*1 *2

System Message

Indicator

Main Item

 

Sub Items

Maintenance

*1: Models with A-type meter

*2: Models with B-type meter

640

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

U.S. models

1Maintenance Service Items

• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if

they are noisy.

 

CODE Maintenance Main Items

● Replace engine oil*1

● Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 734.

CODE Maintenance Sub Items

● Rotate tires

● Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
● Replace transmission fluid*4

● Replace spark plugs
● Inspect valve clearance

● Replace engine coolant

● Replace brake fluid*5
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and

from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance MinderTM.

 

Continuously variable transmission models

If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).

 

Manual transmission models

If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 37,500 miles (60,000 km).

*5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

Maintenance

 

Continued 641

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Canadian models

1Maintenance Service Items

• Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3

if they are noisy.

 

Maintenance

 

CODE Maintenance Main Items

● Replace engine oil*1

● Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).

*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and

from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).

*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance MinderTM.

 

Continuously variable transmission models

If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 40,000 km (25,000 miles).

 

Manual transmission models

If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 60,000 km (37,500 miles).

*5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 736.

CODE Maintenance Sub Items

● Rotate tires

● Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
● Replace transmission fluid*4

● Replace spark plugs
● Inspect valve clearance

● Replace engine coolant

● Replace brake fluid*5
● Service front and rear brakes
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#

642

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Resetting the Display
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the maintenance service.

Models with A-type meter

 

Left Selector Wheel (home) Button

Set the power mode to ON.
Press the (home) button.
Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed.
Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance Minder screen.
Press and hold the left selector wheel for about 10 seconds to enter the reset mode.
Roll the left selector wheel to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All due items (You can also select Cancel to end the process).
Press the left selector wheel to reset the selected item.
Repeat from step 5 for other items you wish to reset.
1Resetting the Display

 

NOTICE

Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.

The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the Maintenance MinderTM display yourself.

Models with 7-in. Color Touchscreen

You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the driver information interface.

Settings P. 129
Models with 9-in. Color Touchscreen

You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the audio/information screen.

Customized Features P. 374
Maintenance

 

Continued 643

 

Maintenance

Maintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Models with B-type meter

 

Right Selector Wheel

Set the power mode to ON.
Roll the right selector wheel until the Maintenance Minder screen is displayed.
Press and hold the right selector wheel for about 10 seconds to enter the reset mode.
Roll the right selector wheel to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All due items (You can also select Cancel to end the process).
Press the right selector wheel to reset the selected item.
Repeat from step 3 for other items you wish to reset.
644

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood

 

1.5 L engine models

 

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Washer Fluid

(Blue Cap)

Engine Coolant Reserve Tank

Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange)

Radiator Cap

Brake/Clutch* Fluid (Black Cap)

Battery

 

Maintenance

* Not available on all models Continued 645

 

Maintenance

Maintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood
2.0 L engine models

 

Engine Oil Dipstick

(Orange)

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Washer Fluid

(Blue Cap)

Engine Coolant

Reserve Tank

Radiator Cap

Brake/Clutch* Fluid (Black Cap)

Battery

* Not available on all models
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Opening the Hood

 

Hood Release Handle

 

Pull

 

Lever

 

Support Rod

Grip

Clamp

Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set the parking brake.
Pull the hood release handle under the driver’s side lower corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly.
Push the hood latch lever (located under the front edge of the hood to the center) to the side and raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.
Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close.

1Opening the Hood

 

WARNING
The hood support rod can become very hot due to heat from the engine.

To ensure against possible burns, do not handle the metal section of the rod: Use the foam grip instead.

NOTICE

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised. The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in possible damage to the hood and/or the wipers.

2.0 L engine models

NOTICE

Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts.

When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated.

Maintenance

 

647

Maintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Maintenance

 

Recommended Engine Oil

 

Use a genuine engine oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable type and viscosity (for the ambient temperature) as shown in the image that follows.

Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.

 

Genuine Engine Oil

Commercial Engine Oil

● Honda Genuine Motor Oil

● Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

with an API Certification Seal on the

container.

Ambient Temperature

Ambient Temperature

*1:Formulated to improve fuel economy.

Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade.

1Recommended Engine Oil

 

Engine Oil Additives

Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability.

The following seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institute’s latest requirements.

648

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Oil Check

 

We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.

1.

Remove the dipstick (orange).

1.5 L engine models

2.

Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or

paper towel.

3.

Insert the dipstick back all the way into its

hole.

 

2.0 L engine models

1Oil Check

 

If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil, being careful not to overfill.

 

Maintenance

Continued 649

Maintenance Under the HooduOil Check
1.5 L engine models

 

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

 

2.0 L engine models

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

 

Maintenance

Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
1Oil Check

 

NOTICE

Under certain driving conditions, it is normal for the engine oil level to rise above the upper mark. If you have a concern, consult a dealer for details.

650

uu Maintenance Under the Hood u Adding Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

1.5 L engine models

 

Engine Oil

Fill Cap

 

2.0 L engine models

Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
Add oil slowly.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely.
Wait for three minutes and recheck the engine oil dipstick.

1 Adding Engine Oil

NOTICE

Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and engine damage.

If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components.

Engine Oil

Fill Cap

Maintenance

 

651

 

Maintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

 

You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.

Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver information interface.

1. Run the engine until it reaches normal

 

operating temperature, and then turn the

engine off.

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil

fill cap.

3. Remove the Phillips-head screws and slotted head screws by turning 90° counter-clockwise on the undercarriage and remove the under cover.

Screw Under Cover

 

Maintenance

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

 

NOTICE

You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground.

652

Maintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
1.5 L engine models

 

Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container.
Drain Bolt

Washer

 

2.0 L engine models

Drain Bolt

Washer

 

Maintenance

Continued 653

Maintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance

 

1.5 L engine models

 

Oil Filter

 

2.0 L engine models

Oil Filter

Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil.
Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.

Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the engine block, and install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter gasket.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:

30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)

Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including filter):

1.5 L engine models

 

3.7 US qt (3.5 L)

2.0 L engine models

 

4.4 US qt (4.2 L)

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine.
Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter.
Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

 

You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.

When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. If the low oil pressure warning appears, turn off the engine, and check your work.

654

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Engine Coolant

 

Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.

We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

1Engine Coolant

 

WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

Reserve Tank

Reserve Tank

MAX

MIN

 

Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank.
u If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.

Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
NOTICE

Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at temperatures as low as about −31°F (−35°C). If your vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for details.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines.

Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

Maintenance

 

Continued 655

Maintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Radiator

Radiator Cap

 

Maintenance

Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counter-clockwise and relieve any pressure in the cooling system.
Push down and turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise to remove it.
The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.
1Engine Coolant

 

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.

Radiator
NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.

656

Maintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Transmission Fluid

 

Continuously variable transmission models

 

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda HCF-2

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Do not attempt to check or change the continuously variable transmission fluid yourself.

Manual transmission models

 

Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda MTF

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

Do not attempt to check or change the manual transmission fluid yourself.

1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid

 

NOTICE

Do not mix Honda HCF-2 with other transmission fluids.

Using a transmission fluid other than Honda HCF-2 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle’s transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Honda HCF-2 is not covered by Honda’s new vehicle limited warranty.

1Manual Transmission Fluid

NOTICE

If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API certificated SAE 0W-20 or 5W-20 viscosity motor oil as a temporary measure.

Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does not contain the proper additives for the transmission and continued use can cause decreased shifting performance and lead to transmission damage.

Maintenance

 

657

Maintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch* Fluid
Brake/Clutch* Fluid

 

Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Checking the Brake Fluid
1Brake/Clutch* Fluid

 

NOTICE

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive

MAX

 

MIN

Reserve Tank

 

Maintenance

The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reserve tank.

Manual transmission models

 

The brake fluid reserve tank is also used for your vehicle’s clutch fluid. As long as you keep the brake fluid level as instructed above, there is no need for checking the clutch fluid level.

damage.

If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.

* Not available on all models
Maintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Refilling Window Washer Fluid

 

Check the amount of window washer fluid.

If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.

 

Canadian models

 

If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the driver information interface.

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid

 

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump.

Use only commercially available windshield washer fluid.

Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime scale buildup.

 

Maintenance

659

Replacing Light Bulbs

Maintenance

 

Headlights

 

Headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Fog Lights*

 

Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Front Turn Signal Lights

 

Front turn signal lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Front Side Marker Lights

 

Front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Parking/Daytime Running Lights

 

Parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*

 

Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Headlights
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

 

* Not available on all models
Replacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Brake Light, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs

 

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

Brake Light: LED

Taillight: LED

Rear Side Marker Light: LED

Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)

Pry on the edge of the cover using a flat-tip screwdriver to remove the cover.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth

 

to prevent scratches.

1Brake Light, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs

 

Brake lights, taillights, and rear side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Cover

Remove the bolts.
Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.

Maintenance

Bolt

Continued 661

Replacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Bulb

 

Socket

 

Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it.
Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Align the pins with the body grommets, then push in until they fully seat.
Maintenance

662

uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs

Taillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs

 

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

Taillight: LED

Back-Up Light: 16 W

1Taillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs

 

Taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda

dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Cover

 

Bulb

Socket

Remove the cover by prying on the edge using a flat-tip screwdriver.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches.

Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it.
Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Maintenance

 

Rear License Plate Light

 

Rear license plate light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

663

Replacing Light BulbsuHigh-Mount Brake Light
High-Mount Brake Light

 

High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

 

Maintenance

664

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

Checking Wiper Blades

 

If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks, become noisy, and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Front Wiper Blade

 

Set the power mode to ON, then to
VEHICLE OFF.

Within 10 seconds of setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, hold the wiper switch in the MIST position for more than two seconds.
u Both wiper arms are set to the maintenance position as shown in the image.

Lift both wiper arms.

1Changing the Front Wiper Blade

 

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.

 

Maintenance

Continued 665

Checking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade
Tab

 

Depress the lock tab, then slide the wiper blade off the wiper arm.
Slide the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
Lower both wiper arms.
Set the power mode to ON, then set the wiper switch to the MIST position once. u The wiper arms return to the standard
position.

Maintenance

666

Checking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade
Changing the Rear Wiper Blade

 

Hold up the wiper arm.

2. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver into the groove

of the wiper arm to remove the wiper

blade.

u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth

to prevent scratches.

Insert a new wiper blade and put the wiper arm back.

Maintenance

667

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Maintenance

 

Checking Tires

 

To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating.

Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly.

Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1-2 psi (10-20 kPa, 0.1-0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for:

Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
Excessive tread wear.
Wear Indicators P. 673
Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
1Checking Tires

 

WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.

Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached.

If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold.

U.S. models

Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must calibrate the TPMS.

TPMS Calibration P. 485
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced.

668

Checking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Tire and Loading Information Label

 

The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information.

 

Label

Example

Tire Labeling

 

1Tire and Loading Information Label

 

The tire and loading information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb contains:

a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not

exceed this weight.

c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and

spare.

Example Tire Size

 

Tire

Identification

Number (TIN)

Maximum

Tire Load

Maximum

Tire Pressure

Tire Size

Tire Sizes
The tires that came on your vehicle have a

number of markings. Those you should be

aware of are described as shown.

1Tire Sizes

Following is an example of tire size with an

explanation of what each component means.

P205/55 R16 89H

P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).

205: Tire width in millimeters.

55: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a

percentage of its width).

R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).

16: Rim diameter in inches.

Maintenance

 

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

89: Load index (a numerical code associated with the

maximum load the tire can carry).

H: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the

maximum speed rating).

Continued 669

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT B97R FW6X 2209

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like

DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all

the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

requirements of the U.S. Department of

Transportation.

■ Glossary of Tire Terminology

B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.

FW6X: Tire type code.

Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at

22 09: Date of manufacture.

least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Year

Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given

inflation pressure.

Week

Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can

hold.

Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum

permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended

by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves

designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

 

Maintenance

670

Checking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

 

The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

 

For example:

Treadwear 200

Traction AA

Temperature A

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Maintenance

 

Continued 671

Checking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Maintenance

 

Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Traction

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

672

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Wear Indicators

 

Example of a Wear

 

Indicator mark

The groove where the wear indicator is

located is about 1/16 inch (about 1.6 mm)

shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the

tread has worn so that the indicator is

exposed, replace the tire.

Worn out tires have poor traction on wet

roads.

Tire Service Life

 

The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

Maintenance

 

673

Checking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Tire and Wheel Replacement

 

Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system to work incorrectly.

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs.

Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

 

Maintenance

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

 

WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner’s manual.

674

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Tire Rotation

Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information

1Tire Rotation

interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.

Tires with directional tread patterns should only be

■ Tires without rotation marks

rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).

Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation

indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Rotate the tires as shown here.

Front

Front

Direction Mark

 

Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.

U.S. models

Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the

TPMS.

2 TPMS Calibration P. 485

Front

Maintenance

 

675

Checking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Winter Tires

 

If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.

Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding.

Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.

When mounting, refer to the following points.

For winter tires:

Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
Mount the tires to all four wheels.

Maintenance

1Winter Tires

 

WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.

NOTICE

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.

676

Checking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
For tire chains:

Install them on the front tires only.
Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the chains listed below:
Models with 215/55R16 tires

 

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1032

Models with 215/50R17 tires

 

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1032

Models with 235/40R18 tires

 

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1034

Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can.
Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
Drive slowly.
1Winter Tires

 

When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle operational limits.

If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.

 

Maintenance

677

Battery

Maintenance

 

Checking the Battery

 

The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the driver information interface will display a warning message. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

 

Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.

If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:

The audio system is disabled.
Reactivating the audio system P. 243
Canadian models only

 

The immobilizer system needs to be reset.
2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 104

Battery

WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.

When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.

WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds.

Wash your hands after handling.

678

BatteryuCharging the Battery
Charging the Battery

 

Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system.

Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.

Battery
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.

When replacing the battery, the replacement must be of the same specifications.

Consult a dealer for more information.

The battery installed in this vehicle is specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop.

Using a battery other than this specified type may shorten the battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace the battery, make sure to select the specified type and size. Ask a dealer for more details.

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, safety support and low tire pressure/ TPMS* indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

 

Maintenance

 

* Not available on all models 679

Remote Transmitter Care

Maintenance

 

Replacing the Remote Battery

 

If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

 

Battery type: CR2032

Remove the built-in key.
Remove the upper half of the cover by

carefully prying on the slot with key grip. u Wrap a key grip with a cloth to prevent

scratching the keyless remote.

u Remove carefully to avoid losing the buttons.

Remove the battery by prying on the edge with flat-tip screwdriver. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity.

Battery u Wrap a flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth

to prevent scratching the keyless remote.

1Replacing the Remote Battery

 

WARNING
CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD

The battery that powers the remote transmitter can cause severe internal burns and can even lead to death if swallowed. Keep new and used batteries away from children.

If you suspect that a child has swallowed the battery, seek medical attention immediately.

NOTICE

An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.

680

Climate Control System Maintenance

Air Conditioning

 

To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.

Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

Dust and Pollen Filter

 

The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.

We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

1Air Conditioning

 

NOTICE

Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment. To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the evaporator with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is flammable and can be ignited during servicing if proper procedures are not followed.

The air conditioner label is found under the hood:

Safety Labels P. 88
Specifications P. 726
Canadian models

: Caution

: Flammable Refrigerant

: Requires Registered

Technician to Service

: Air Conditioning

System

1Dust and Pollen Filter

If the airflow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.

Maintenance

 

681

Cleaning

Maintenance

 

Interior Care

 

Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.

Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.

Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.

 

Opening

Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

1Interior Care

 

Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them.

Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside the vehicle.

If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.

Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry cloth.

Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

1Cleaning the Window

Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them.

Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass cleaner, on or around the cover of both the front wide view camera and the rainfall/light sensor*.

* Not available on all models
CleaninguInterior Care
Floor Mats

Unlock

Lock

The driver’s floor mat hooks over floor anchors, which keep the mat from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mat.

1Floor Mats

 

If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions.

Maintaining Genuine Leather*
To properly clean leather:

Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90% water and 10% neutral soap.
Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth.
Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.
1Maintaining Genuine Leather *

It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the leather. In addition, please note that some dark colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats resulting in discoloration or stains.

Maintenance

* Not available on all models 683

 

CleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance

 

Exterior Care

 

Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions:

If driving on roads with road salt.
If driving in coastal areas.
If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
Using an Automated Car Wash
Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
Fold in the door mirrors.
For models equipped with automatic intermittent wipers, turn the wipers off.
Using High Pressure Cleaners
Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to enter the vehicle interior.
Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead, use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
1Washing the Vehicle

 

Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can cause a malfunction.

Air Intake Vents

Do not spray water onto the fuel fill door directly. A high-pressure spray may cause it to open.

Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel system or engine.

If you need to lift the wiper arms away from the windshield, first set the wiper arms to the maintenance position.

Changing the Front Wiper Blade P. 665
684

CleaninguExterior Care
Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary.

Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water.

Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish, the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains, wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.

1Applying Wax

 

NOTICE

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately.

1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin.

Maintenance

 

Continued 685

CleaninguExterior Care
Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash. Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.

Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.

However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

 

Maintenance

686

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories

 

When installing accessories, check the following:

Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and delay your reaction to driving conditions.
Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or backs of the front seats, on the sides of the rear seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy.

Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 714

Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
1Accessories and Modifications

 

WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding accessories and modifications.

Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

 

Maintenance

687

Accessories and ModificationsuModifications
Modifications

 

Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar effect.

Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.

The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely affect the vehicle’s electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.

Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components.

 

Maintenance

688

Handling the Unexpected

This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools

Types of Tools 690

If a Tire Goes Flat

Changing a Flat Tire 691

Engine Does Not Start

Checking the Engine 698

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak .. 699

Emergency Engine Start 700

Emergency Engine Stop 701

If the Battery Is Dead

Jump Starting Procedure 702

Shift Lever Does Not Move 705

Overheating

How to Handle Overheating 706

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Engine oil pressure low Warning

Appears 708

If the Charging System Indicator Comes

On 709

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes

On or Blinks 709

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes

On or Blinks 710

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On.. 712

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Indicator Comes On 711

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

Comes On or Blinks 713

Fuses

Fuse Locations 714

Inspecting and Changing Fuses 718

Emergency Towing 720

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door ..721

If You Cannot Open the Hatch 722

Refueling 723

689

Tools

Types of Tools

 

Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack

 

Jack Handle

1Types of Tools

 

The tools are stored in the cargo area.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Jack Handle Bar Funnel

Tool Case

690

If a Tire Goes Flat

Changing a Flat Tire

 

If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced.

Park the vehicle on a firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake.
Continuously variable transmission models

 

Put the transmission into P.
Manual transmission models

 

Put the transmission into R.
All models

 

Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
1Changing a Flat Tire

 

Follow compact spare precautions:

Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible.

The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

NOTICE

Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly. Call your dealer or a professional towing service.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 691

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
Pull the strap on the floor lid and open the lid.

Strap

Handling the Unexpected

 

Tool Case

 

Spare Tire

Take the tool case out of the cargo area.
Take the jack, wheel nut wrench, and jack handle bar out of the tool case.
Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

Wheel

Blocks

The tire to be replaced.

692

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up) under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced.

Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 693

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

 

How to Set Up the Jack

Jacking Points

 

Jacking Point

Jack

Handle

Wheel Nut

Bar

Wrench as Jack Handle

 

Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed.
Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in the image until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch.

Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground.
1How to Set Up the Jack

 

WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle.

Use the jack provided in your vehicle.

Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or may not fit the jacking point.

The following instructions must be followed to use the jack safely:

Do not use while the engine is running.
Use only where the ground is firm and level.
Use only at the jacking points.
Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
Do not put anything on top of or underneath the jack.
694

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Replacing the Flat Tire
Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel

with a clean cloth.

3. Mount the compact spare tire.

Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop rotating.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order.

 

Wheel nut torque:

80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)

1Replacing the Flat Tire

 

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 695

If a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected

 

Storing the Flat Tire

Center Cap

Spacer Cone Wing Bolt

 

For For full-

compact size tire spare tire

Remove the center cap.
Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well.
Remove the spacer cone from the wing bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
Securely store the jack, wheel nut wrench, and jack handle bar back in the tool case. Store the case in the cargo area.
1Storing the Flat Tire

 

WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.

696

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

U.S. models

 

TPMS and the Compact Spare Tire
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), Tire pressure monitor system problem. Check tire pressure. See your dealer. will appear on the driver information interface and the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on; however, this is normal and is no cause for concern.

Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.

TPMS Calibration P. 485
Handling the Unexpected

 

697

Handling the

Engine Does Not Start

Checking the Engine

 

If the engine does not start, check the starter.

1Checking the Engine

If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an

assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it.

2 If the Battery Is Dead P. 702

Starter condition

Checklist

Starter doesn’t turn or turns

Check for a message on the driver information interface.

over slowly.

● If the To start, touch start button with emblem side of remote message appears

The battery may be dead. Check

2 If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak P. 699

uMake sure the keyless remote is in its operating range.

each of the items on the right and

2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 186

 

respond accordingly.

Check the brightness of the interior lights.

Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness.

 

If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2 Battery P. 678

If the interior lights come on normally
Fuses P. 714
Emergency Engine Start P. 700
Unexpected

 

The starter turns over normally but the engine doesn’t start.

There may be a problem with a fuse. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.

Review the engine start procedure.

Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again.

Starting the Engine P. 448
Check the immobilizer system indicator.

When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.

Immobilizer System P. 179
Check the fuel level.

There should be enough fuel in the tank.

Fuel Gauge P. 113
Check the fuses.

Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 718
If the problem continues:

Emergency Towing P. 720
698

uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak

If the Keyless Remote Battery is Weak

 

If the beeper sounds, the To start, touch start button with emblem side of remote message appears on the driver information interface, and the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes, and the engine won’t start, start the engine as follows:

Touch the center of the ENGINE START/ STOP button with the H logo on the keyless

remote while the ENGINE START/STOP

button is flashing. The buttons on the

keyless remote should be facing you.

u The ENGINE START/STOP button

flashes for about 30 seconds.

Depress the brake pedal (continuously

variable transmission) or clutch pedal

(manual transmission) and press the

ENGINE START/STOP button within 10

seconds after the beeper sounds and the

ENGINE START/STOP button changes

from flashing to on.

u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode

will change to ACCESSORY.

Handling the Unexpected

 

699

Engine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Start
Continuously variable transmission models

Handling the Unexpected

 

Emergency Engine Start

 

If the engine does not start using the normal engine starting procedure, you may be able to start it using the emergency start procedure below.

Do not use this procedure if it is not an emergency.

Make sure the parking brake is applied.
u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) comes on for 30 seconds when you pull up the electric parking brake switch.

Check that the transmission is in P, then set the power mode to ACCESSORY.
Firmly depress the brake pedal, then press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for at least 15 seconds.
This should be considered a system malfunction even if you are able to start the engine using the above procedure.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

1Emergency Engine Start

 

Refer to the following if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P position.

Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 705
700

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop

Emergency Engine Stop

 

The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations:

Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.
Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place. With manual transmission models you can also downshift the transmission to utilize engine braking.

Continuously variable transmission models

 

The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.

To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, put the transmission into P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop.

Manual transmission models

 

The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.

1Emergency Engine Stop

 

Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be turned off.

If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving, the beeper sounds.

Handling the Unexpected

 

701

If the Battery Is Dead

Jump Starting Procedure

 

Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine, then open the hood.

1.5 L engine models

1.

Open the cover on the positive + terminal.

2.

Connect the first jumper cable to your

vehicle’s battery + terminal.

3.

Connect the other end of the first jumper

cable to the booster battery + terminal.

u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.

u When using an automotive battery

charger to boost your 12-volt battery,

Handling

Booster Battery

select a lower charging voltage than 15-

volt. Check the charger manual for the

2.0 L engine models

proper setting.

the

4.

Connect the second jumper cable to the

booster battery – terminal.

Unexpected

Booster Battery

 

1If the Battery Is Dead

 

WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.

Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.

702

If the Battery Is DeaduJump Starting Procedure
1.5 L engine models

 

Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the stud bolt as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part.
If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine and increase its rpm slightly.
Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
1If the Battery Is Dead

 

Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.

2.0 L engine models

Handling the Unexpected

 

Continued 703

If the Battery Is DeaduJump Starting Procedure
What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order.

Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground.
Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery – terminal.
Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal.
Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery + terminal.
1What to Do After the Engine Starts

 

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow*, safety support and low tire pressure/ TPMS* indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

* Not available on all models
Shift Lever Does Not Move

Continuously variable transmission models

 

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the P position.

Releasing the Lock
Cover

 

Slot

Set the parking brake.
Remove the built-in key from the keyless remote.
Wrap a cloth around the tip of the built-in key. Put it into the shift lock release slot as shown in the image, and remove the cover.
Handling the

Release Button 4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.

 

While pushing the key in, press the shift
lever release button, and place the shift

lever into N.

u The lock is now released. Have the shift

lever checked by a dealer as soon as

possible.

Shift Lock Release Slot

Unexpected

 

705

Overheating

How to Handle Overheating

 

Overheating symptoms are as follows:

1How to Handle Overheating

 

Models with B-type meter

 

The temperature gauge pointer is at the power.
All models

 

H

mark or the engine suddenly loses

WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.

Handling the Unexpected

 

The Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. message appears on the driver information interface.
Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
First thing to do
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.

u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides. Then, open the hood.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

NOTICE

Models with B-type meter

Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge pointer at the H mark may damage the engine.

All models

Continuing to drive with the Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool.

message on the driver information interface may damage the engine.

706

OverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
Next thing to do

Reserve Tank

MAX

MIN

Last thing to do
Check that the cooling fan is operating and stop the engine once the Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. message on the driver information interface disappears. u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.

Once the engine has cooled down, inspect the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is low, add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.

u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on.

1How to Handle Overheating

 

WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.

Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.

Handling the Unexpected

 

Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the driver information interface.

If the Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. message does not appear, resume driving. If it appears again, contact a dealer for repairs.

707

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

Handling the Unexpected

 

If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears

Reasons for the warning to appear Appears when the engine oil pressure is low.
What to do as soon as the warning appears

Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place.
If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights
on.

What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for

approximately three minutes.

2. Open the hood and check the oil level. u Add oil as necessary.

2 Oil Check P. 649

3. Start the engine and check the Engine oil pressure low warning.

u The warning disappears: Start driving again.

u The warning does not disappear within 10 seconds: Immediately stop the engine and contact a dealer for repairs.

1If the Engine oil pressure low Warning Appears

 

NOTICE

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

708

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on

 

Comes on when there is a problem with the charging system.

What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop in a safe place and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink

 

• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control system.

Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer.

What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

 

If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery.

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

NOTICE

If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged.

If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected.

Handling the Unexpected

 

709

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

Handling the Unexpected

 

U.S.

 

Canada

 

(Red)

Reasons for the indicator to come on
The brake fluid is low.
There is a malfunction in the brake system.
What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
Reasons for the indicator to blink

There is a problem with the electric parking brake system.

What to do when the indicator blinks
Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

 

Have your vehicle repaired immediately.

It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift the gears.

If the brake system indicator (red) and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking.

Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, the parking brake may not work.

Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 712
710

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On

Reasons for the indicator to come on

Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.

What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

If Do not drive displays on the driver information interface, immediately stop in a safe place and contact a dealer.
Handling the Unexpected

 

711

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same

 

Handling the Unexpected

 

U.S.

 

Canada

(Red)

 

U.S.

Canada

(Amber)

If the brake system indicator (red) comes on or blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, release the parking brake manually or automatically.
2 Parking Brake P. 601

 

•If the brake system indicator (red) continuously comes on or blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it inspected by a dealer immediately.

u Preventing the vehicle from moving.

Continuously variable transmission models

 

Put the transmission into P.

Manual transmission models

 

Put the transmission into 1 or R.

•If only the brake system indicator (red) is turned off, avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

If you apply the parking brake, you may not be able to release it.

If the brake system indicator (red) and the brake system indicator (amber) come on at the same time, the parking brake is working.

If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, the parking brake may not work because it is checking the system.

If you repeatedly operate the electric parking brake in a short period of time, the brake stops operating to prevent heating of the system and the indicator blinks.

It returns to its original state in approximately 1 minute.

712

Indicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
U.S. models

 

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink

A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated. If there is a problem with the TPMS, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.

If the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator will either come on or it will first blink for about one minute, then stay on.

What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.

Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb.

u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.

TPMS Calibration P. 485
If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to come on, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the TPMS.

What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to first blink, and then stay on, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the TPMS.

TPMS Calibration P. 485
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

 

NOTICE

Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

Handling the Unexpected

 

713

Fuses

Fuse Locations

 

If any electrical devices are not working, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Located near the battery. Push the tabs to open the box.

Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.

 

Handling the Unexpected

 

FusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Inspecting and Changing Fuses

 

Handling the

Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Turn

headlights and all accessories off.

2.

Remove the fuse box cover.

Hole

3.

Check the main fuse in the engine

compartment fuse box.

u Look the fuse through the hole.

u If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a

dealer.

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses

 

NOTICE

Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system.

Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and confirm the specified amperage on the fuse label.

Fuse Locations P. 714
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage.

Unexpected

 

Main Fuse

718

FusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Check the combined fuses in the engine compartment fuse box.
u Look into the space between the fuses. u If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a

dealer.

 

Blown Fuse

Combined Fuse

5. Inspect the small fuses in the engine

compartment and the vehicle interior.

Fuse Puller

u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with

the fuse puller and replace it with a new

one.

 

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses

 

There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine compartment fuse box cover.

Handling the Unexpected

 

719

Emergency Towing

Handling the Unexpected

 

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

Flatbed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.

This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.

1Emergency Towing

 

NOTICE

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle’s weight.

Make sure the parking brake is released. If you cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must be transported by the flatbed equipment.

Parking Brake P. 601
NOTICE

Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission.

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break.

720

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

What to Do If Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure.

Open the hatch and remove the cover on the left side of cargo area.
Pull the release cord toward you.

u The release cord unlocks the fuel fill door

when it is pulled.

Cover

1If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

 

After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.

3. Open the fuel fill door.

Release Cord

2 How to Refuel P. 627

 

Handling the Unexpected

 

721

If You Cannot Open the Hatch

Handling the

What to Do If Unable to Open the Hatch
If you cannot open the hatch, use the following procedure.

Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the

cover on the back of the hatch.

u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches.

Cover

To open the hatch, push the hatch while sliding the lever with the flat-tip screw

driver.

1If You Cannot Open the Hatch

 

When you open the hatch from inside, make sure there is enough space around the hatch, and it does not hit anyone or any object.

Following up:

After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.

Unexpected

 

Sliding

Lever

722

Refueling

Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

 

If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

Turn off the engine.
Press on the edge of the fuel fill door until

you hear a click when the driver’s door is unlocked.

u The fuel fill door opens.

3. Take the funnel out of the tool case in the cargo area.

Funnel 2 Types of Tools P. 690

Place the end of the funnel on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the funnel goes down along with the filler pipe.

Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel

container.

u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.

6. Remove the funnel from the filler neck. u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before

storing it.

7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

 

WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flames away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
NOTICE

Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container or any funnel other than the one provided with your vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system.

Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel system and its seal.

Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is gasoline before you refuel.

Handling the Unexpected

 

723

This page intentionally left blank.

724

Information

This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other information required by regulation.

Specifications ………………………………

726

Emissions Testing

Identification Numbers

Testing of Readiness Codes…………..

731

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),

Warranty Coverages ……………………

734

Engine Number, and Transmission

Authorized Manuals…………………….

737

Number …………………………………..

728

Customer Service Information………

738

Devices that Emit Radio Waves …….

729

Reporting Safety Defects ……………..

730

725

Specifications

Information

 

Vehicle Specifications
Model

Civic

No. of Passengers:

Front

2

Rear

3

Total

5

Weights:

Gross Vehicle

See the certification label on the driver’s

Weight Rating

doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight

See the certification label on the driver’s

Rating (Front)

doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight

See the certification label on the driver’s

Rating (Rear)

doorjamb

Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Type

HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)

Charge Quantity

15.3

– 17.1 oz (435 – 485 g)

Lubricant Type

RL85HM (POE)*1

ND-OIL 14 (POE)*2

Quantity

6.41

– 7.32 cu-in (105 – 120 cm3)*2

6.71

– 7.5 cu-in (110 – 123 cm3)*1

*1: 1.5 L engine models

*2: 2.0 L engine models

Engine Specifications
91.38 cu-in (1,498 cm3)*1

Displacement

121.76 cu-in (1,996 cm3)*2

DILKAR8P8SY*1

Spark Plugs

NGK

DILKAR7H11GS*2

DILKAR7G11GS*2

DENSO

DXE22HQR-D11S*2

*1:

1.5 L engine models

*2:

2.0 L engine models

Fuel
Type

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number

of 87 or higher

Fuel Tank Capacity 12.39 US gal (46.9 L)

Washer Fluid
U.S.: 1.6 US qt (1.5 L)

Tank Capacity

Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)

■ Light Bulbs

 

Headlights (Low Beam)

LED

Headlights (High Beam)

LED

Fog Lights*

LED

Parking/Daytime Running Lights

LED

Front Side Marker Lights

LED

Front Turn Signal Lights

LED

Side Turn Signal Lights

LED

(on Door Mirrors)*

Brake Lights

LED

Rear Turn Signal Lights

21 W (Amber)

Rear Side Marker Lights

LED

Back-Up Lights

16 W

Taillights

LED

High-Mount Brake Light

LED

Rear License Plate Light

LED

Interior Lights

Map Lights

LED

Ceiling Light

LED

Vanity Mirror Lights*

2 W

Center Console Light*

LED

Glove Box Light

LED

Cargo Area Light

5 W

 

* Not available on all models
Specificationsu
Brake/Clutch* Fluid
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid
Specified

Honda HCF-2

Capacity

Change

2.9 US qt (2.7 L)

Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified

Honda MTF

Capacity

Change

2.0 US qt (1.9 L)

Engine Oil
Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20

Recommended

API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

Change

3.4 US qt (3.2 L)*1

4.2 US qt (4.0 L)*2

Capacity

Change

3.7 US qt (3.5 L)*1

including

4.4 US qt (4.2 L)*2

filter

*1:

1.5 L engine models

*2:

2.0 L engine models

Engine Coolant
Specified

Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2

Ratio

50/50 with distilled water

1.51

US gal (5.72

L)*1

1.48

US gal (5.59

L)*2

Capacity

1.56

US gal (5.90

L)*3

(change including the remaining

0.17

US gal (0.65

L) in the reserve tank)

*1: CVT models with1.5 L engine

*2: MT models with1.5 L engine

*3: 2.0 L engine models

■ Tire

215/55R16 93H*1

Size

215/50R17 91H*2

235/40R18 91W*3

Regular

Front

32 (220 [2.2])*1 *2

Pressure

33 (230 [2.3])*3

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

Rear

32 (220 [2.2])

Size

T125/80D16 97M*1 *2

Compact

T125/85D16 99M*3

Spare

Pressure

60 (420 [4.2])

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

16 x 7J*1

Wheel Size

Regular

17 x 7J*2

18 x 8J*3

Compact Spare

16 x 4T

*1: Models with 16 inch wheel

*2: Models with 17 inch wheel

*3: Models with 18 inch wheel

Information

 

* Not available on all models 727

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number

 

Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.

The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and transmission number are shown as follows.

 

1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number

 

The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover.

Information

 

1.5 L engine models

Engine Number

Continuously Variable Transmission Number

Manual Transmission Number

2.0 L engine models

Engine Number

Continuously Variable Transmission Number

Manual Transmission Number

Vehicle Identification Number

Certification Label/

Vehicle Identification

Number

728

Devices that Emit Radio Waves

Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements and standards of the regulation listed below:

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Information

 

729

Reporting Safety Defects

Information

 

In the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.

730

Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

 

Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions components are working properly.

The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected.

To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

1.5 L engine models

 

Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in P (continuously variable transmission) or N (manual transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about 3 minutes.
Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
1Testing of Readiness Codes

 

The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.

If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.

Information

 

Continued 731

Emissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
Information

 

Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in D (continuously variable transmission) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
2.0 L engine models

 

Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in P (continuously variable transmission) or N (manual transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about 3 minutes.
Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
732

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in D (continuously variable transmission) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds). While the vehicle is traveling in this speed range, shift to 6th gear and then accelerate and decelerate 5 times, each time making sure you do not exceed 60 mph (97 km/h).
Park the vehicle and let the engine idle for 1 minute without using the accelerator pedal.
Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
Information

 

733

Information

 

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.

Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.

734

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts
The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair the vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed service on the vehicle. This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely for commercial or industrial use.

Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for repairs to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed on the vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty. The Federal Trade Commission requires that a manufacturer demonstrate that an aftermarket or recycled part or service performed by a person other than an authorized service provider caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty before denying warranty coverage. Additionally, federal law allows a manufacturer to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage if the manufacturer provides the article or service to consumers free of charge under the warranty or the manufacturer has secured a waiver from the Federal Trade Commission.

Warranty Coveragesu
Information

 

Continued 735

Warranty Coveragesu
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

EPA Contact Information
An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:

Director,

Light-Duty Vehicle Center,

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,

Attention: Warranty Claim

2000 Traverwood Drive,

Ann Arbor, MI 48105;

[email protected]

Information

 

736

Authorized Manuals

Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.

For U.S. Owners
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.

For Canadian Owners
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.

Information

 

737

Customer Service Information

Information

 

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Customer Services.

U.S. Owners Canadian Owners

American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Canada Inc.

Honda Automobile Customer Service Customer Relations

Mail Stop CHI-5 180 Honda Boulevard

1919 Torrance Blvd. Markham, ON

Torrance, CA 90501-2746 L6C 0H9

Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9

Fax: 1-877-939-0909

E-mail: [email protected]

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin

Islands

Bella International

P.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546

1Customer Service Information

owners.honda.com (U.S.)

honda.ca (Canada)

31T40600

2022 Honda Civic Hatchback Owner’s Manual

OM-16867

00X31-T40-6000

© 2021 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. — All Rights Reserved

Printed in U.S.A.

 

Leave a Reply 0

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *


This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.